BA01853D/06/EN/01.18
71402605
2018-06-01

Products

Solutions

Services

Valid as of version
01.00.zz (Device firmware)

Operating Instructions
Proline Promag P 300
PROFIBUS DP
Electromagnetic flowmeter

Keep cover

Sp a
nnu

ng

öff
ne

n

hile
tw
gh

ti

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP• Make sure the document is stored in a safe place such that it is always available whenworking on or with the device.
• To avoid danger to individuals or the facility, read the "Basic safety instructions" section
carefully, as well as all other safety instructions in the document that are specific toworking procedures.
• The manufacturer reserves the right to modify technical data without prior notice. Your
Endress+Hauser Sales Center will supply you with current information and updates tothese instructions.

2

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Table of contents

Table of contents
1

About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

6Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

1.1
1.2

6.1

6.3

Installation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6.1.1 Mounting position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6.1.2 Environment- and process-related
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6.1.3 Special mounting instructions . . . . . . 26
Mounting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.2.1 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.2.2 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 26
6.2.3 Mounting the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
6.2.4 Turning the transmitter housing . . . . 31
6.2.5 Turning the display module . . . . . . . . 31
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

1.4

Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Symbols used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.1 Safety symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.2 Electrical symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.3 Communication symbols . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2.4 Tool symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.5 Symbols forcertain types of information . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2.6 Symbols in graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3.1 Standard documentation . . . . . . . . . . . 8
1.3.2 Supplementary device-dependent
documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

7Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

2

Basic safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

7.1

2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7

Requirements for the personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Device-specific IT security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.7.1 Protecting access via hardware write
protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.7.2 Protecting access via a password . . . . 11
2.7.3 Access via Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.7.4 Access via service interface (CDIRJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

7.6
7.7

Connection conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
7.1.1 Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
7.1.2 Requirements for connecting cable . . . 33
7.1.3 Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
7.1.4 Shielding and grounding . . . . . . . . . . 36
7.1.5 Preparing the measuring device . . . . . 37
Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 37
7.2.1 Connecting the transmitter . . . . . . . . 38
7.2.2 Connecting the remote display andoperating module DKX001 . . . . . . . . 41
Ensuring potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7.3.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7.3.2 Connection example, standard
scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
7.3.3 Connection example in special
situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
7.4.1 Connection examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
7.5.1 Setting the device address . . . . . . . . . 46
7.5.2 Enabling the terminating resistor . . . . 47
7.5.3 Activating the default IP address . . . . 47
Ensuring the degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . 48
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

8Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

8.1
8.2

Overview of operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Structure and function of the operating
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
8.2.1 Structure of the operating menu . . . . 50
8.2.2 Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Access to the operating menu via the local
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
8.3.1 Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
8.3.2 Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
8.3.3 Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
8.3.4 Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
8.3.5 Opening the context menu . . . . . . . . . 58
8.3.6 Navigating and selecting from list . . . 60

1.3

6.2

7.2

7.3

3

Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

7.4

3.1

Product design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

7.5

4

Incoming acceptance and productidentification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

4.1
4.2

Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Product identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.2.1 Transmitter nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.2.2 Sensor nameplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.2.3 Symbols on measuring device . . . . . . 18

5

Storage and transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

5.1
5.2

Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Transporting the product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.2.1 Measuring devices without lifting
lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
5.2.2 Measuring devices with lifting lugs . . 20
5.2.3 Transporting with a fork lift . . . . . . . . 20
Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

5.3

Endress+Hauser

8.3

3

Table of contents

8.3.7
8.3.8
8.3.9
8.3.10

8.4

8.5

Calling the parameter directly . . . . . . 60
Calling up help text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Changing the parameters . . . . . . . . . 61
User roles and related accessauthorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
8.3.11 Disabling write protection via accesscode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
8.3.12 Enabling and disabling the keypadlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Access to the operating menu via the Webbrowser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.4.1 Function range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.4.2 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
8.4.3 Establishing a connection . . . . . . . . . 65
8.4.4 Logging on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
8.4.5 User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
8.4.6 Disabling the Web server . . . . . . . . . . 69
8.4.7 Logging out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Access to the operating menu via theoperating tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
8.5.1 Connecting the operating tool . . . . . . 70
8.5.2 FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
8.5.3 DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

9

System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

9.1

Overview of device description files . . . . . . . . . 75
9.1.1 Current version data for the device . . . 75
9.1.2 Operating tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Device master file (GSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
9.2.1 Manufacturer-specific GSD . . . . . . . . 76
9.2.2 Profile GSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Compatibility with earlier model . . . . . . . . . . . 76
9.3.1 Automatic identification (factory
setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
9.3.2 Manual setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
9.3.3 Replacing the measuring devices
without changing the GSD file orrestarting the controller . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Using the GSD modules of the previous
model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
9.4.1 Using the CONTROL_BLOCK modulein the previous model . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Cyclic data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
9.5.1 Block model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
9.5.2 Description of the modules . . . . . . . . 80
Address shifting configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
9.6.1 Function description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
9.6.2 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
9.6.3 Configuring address shifting . . . . . . . 87
9.6.4 Accessing data via PROFIBUS DP . . . . 87

9.2
9.3

9.4

9.5
9.6

10

Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

10.1 Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
10.2 Switching on the measuring device . . . . . . . . . 89
10.3 Connecting via FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
10.4 Configuring the device address via software . . 89
10.4.1 PROFIBUS network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
10.5 Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

10.6

Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 90
10.6.1 Defining the tag name . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
10.6.2 Setting the system units . . . . . . . . . . 92
10.6.3 Configuring communicationinterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
10.6.4 Configuring the analog inputs . . . . . . 95
10.6.5 Displaying the I/O configuration . . . . 95
10.6.6 Configuring the current input . . . . . . 96
10.6.7 Configuring the status input . . . . . . . 97
10.6.8 Configuring the current output . . . . . 98
10.6.9 Configuring the pulse/frequency/
switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
10.6.10 Configuring the relay output . . . . . . 107
10.6.11 Configuring the local display . . . . . . 109
10.6.12 Configuring the low flow cut off . . . . 111
10.6.13 Configuring empty pipe detection . . 113
10.7 Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
10.7.1 Carrying out a sensor adjustment . . . 115
10.7.2 Configuring the totalizer . . . . . . . . . 115
10.7.3 Carrying out additional display
configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
10.7.4 Performing electrode cleaning . . . . . 120
10.7.5 WLAN configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
10.7.6 Configuration management . . . . . . . 122
10.7.7 Using parameters for device
administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
10.8 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
10.9 Protecting settings from unauthorizedaccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
10.9.1 Write protection via access code . . . 128
10.9.2 Write protection via write protection
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

11

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

11.1 Reading the device locking status . . . . . . . . . 131
11.2 Adjusting the operating language . . . . . . . . . 131
11.3 Configuring the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
11.4 Reading measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
11.4.1 "Process variables" submenu . . . . . . . 132
11.4.2 Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
11.4.3 "Input values" submenu . . . . . . . . . . 134
11.4.4 Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
11.5 Adapting the measuring device to the process
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
11.6 Performing a totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
11.7 Showing data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

12

Diagnostics and troubleshooting . . 141

12.1
12.2

General troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Diagnostic information via light emitting
diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
12.2.1 Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
12.3 Diagnostic information on local display . . . . . 145
12.3.1 Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
12.3.2 Calling up remedial measures . . . . . 147
12.4 Diagnostic information in the Web browser . 147
12.4.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
12.4.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 148
Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

12.5

Diagnostic information in FieldCare or
DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
12.5.1 Diagnostic options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
12.5.2 Calling up remedy information . . . . 149
12.6 Adapting the diagnostic information . . . . . . 150
12.6.1 Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . 150
12.7 Overview of diagnostic information . . . . . . . 153
12.7.1 Diagnostic of sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
12.7.2 Diagnostic of electronic . . . . . . . . . . 155
12.7.3 Diagnostic of configuration . . . . . . . 163
12.7.4 Diagnostic of process . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
12.8 Pending diagnostic events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
12.9 Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
12.10 Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
12.10.1 Reading out the event logbook . . . . . 176
12.10.2 Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . 177
12.10.3 Overview of information events . . . . 177
12.11 Resetting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . 179
12.11.1 Function scope of the "Device reset"
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
12.12 Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
12.13 Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

13

Table of contents

16.7 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
16.8 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
16.9 Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
16.10 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
16.11 Operability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
16.12 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
16.13 Application packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
16.14 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
16.15 Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

13.1

Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
13.1.1 Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
13.1.2 Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
13.1.3 Replacing seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
13.2 Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 182
13.3 Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

14

Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

14.1

General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
14.1.1 Repair and conversion concept . . . . . 183
14.1.2 Notes for repair and conversion . . . . 183
14.2 Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
14.3 Endress+Hauser services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
14.4 Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
14.5 Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
14.5.1 Removing the measuring device . . . . 184
14.5.2 Disposing of the measuring device . . 184

15

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

15.1
15.2
15.3

Device-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
15.1.1 For the transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
15.1.2 For the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Service-specific accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

16

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

16.1 Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
16.2 Function and system design . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
16.3 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
16.4 Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
16.5 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
16.6 Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Endress+Hauser

5About this document

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

1

About this document

1.1

Document function

These Operating Instructions contain all the information that is required in various phasesof the life cycle of the device: from product identification, incoming acceptance andstorage, to mounting, connection, operation and commissioning through totroubleshooting, maintenance and disposal.

1.2

Symbols used

1.2.1

Safety symbols
SymbolMeaning

DANGERDANGER!
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation will
result in serious or fatal injury.

WARNINGWARNING!
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can
result in serious or fatal injury.

CAUTIONCAUTION!
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can
result in minor or medium injury.

NOTICENOTE!
This symbol contains information on procedures and other facts which do not result inpersonal injury.

1.2.2

Electrical symbols
SymbolMeaning
Direct current
Alternating current
Direct current and alternating current
Ground connection
A grounded terminal which, as far as the operator is concerned, is grounded via agrounding system.
Protective Earth (PE)A terminal which must be connected to ground prior to establishing any otherconnections.
The ground terminals are situated inside and outside the device:• Inner ground terminal: Connects the protectiv earth to the mains supply.
• Outer ground terminal: Connects the device to the plant grounding system.

1.2.3

Communication symbols
SymbolMeaning
Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN)
Communication via a wireless, local network.
LED
Light emitting diode is off.

6

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

About this document

SymbolMeaning
LED
Light emitting diode is on.
LED
Light emitting diode is flashing.

1.2.4

Tool symbols
SymbolMeaning
Flat blade screwdriver
Allen key
Open-ended wrench

1.2.5

Symbols for certain types of information
SymbolMeaning
Permitted
Procedures, processes or actions that are permitted.
Preferred
Procedures, processes or actions that are preferred.
Forbidden
Procedures, processes or actions that are forbidden.
Tip
Indicates additional information.
Reference to documentation.
Reference to page.

A

Reference to graphic.
Notice or individual step to be observed.
1. , 2. , 3. …

Series of steps.
Result of a step.
Help in the event of a problem.
Visual inspection.

1.2.6

Symbols in graphics
SymbolMeaning

1, 2, 3, ...

Item numbers

1. , 2. , 3. , …

Series of steps

A, B, C, ...

Views

A-A, B-B, C-C, ...

Sections

Endress+Hauser

Hazardous area

7

About this document

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Symbol.

Meaning
Safe area (non-hazardous area)
Flow direction

1.3

Documentation
For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to thefollowing:• W@M Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer): Enter the serial number
from nameplate• Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate orscan the 2D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate
Detailed list of the individual documents along with the documentation code→  213

1.3.1

Standard documentation

Document type

Purpose and content of the document

Technical Information

Planning aid for your device
The document contains all the technical data on the device and provides
an overview of the accessories and other products that can be ordered forthe device.

Sensor Brief Operating Instructions

Guides you quickly to the 1st measured value - Part 1
The Sensor Brief Operating Instructions are aimed at specialists withresponsibility for installing the measuring device.
• Incoming acceptance and product identification• Storage and transport• Installation

Transmitter Brief Operating
Instructions

Guides you quickly to the 1st measured value - Part 2
The Transmitter Brief Operating Instructions are aimed at specialists withresponsibility for commissioning, configuring and parameterizing themeasuring device (until the first measured value).
• Product description• Installation• Electrical connection• Operation options• System integration• Commissioning• Diagnostic information

Description of Device Parameters

1.3.2

Reference for your parameters
The document provides a detailed explanation of each individual
parameter in the Expert operating menu. The description is aimed atthose who work with the device over the entire life cycle and perform
specific configurations.

Supplementary device-dependent documentation

Additional documents are supplied depending on the device version ordered: Always
comply strictly with the instructions in the supplementary documentation. The
supplementary documentation is an integral part of the device documentation.

1.4

Registered trademarks

PROFIBUS®
Registered trademark of the PROFIBUS User Organization, Karlsruhe, Germany
8

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Basic safety instructions

2

Basic safety instructions

2.1

Requirements for the personnel

The personnel for installation, commissioning, diagnostics and maintenance must fulfill
the following requirements:‣ Trained, qualified specialists must have a relevant qualification for this specific function
and task.
‣ Are authorized by the plant owner/operator.
‣ Are familiar with federal/national regulations.
‣ Before starting work, read and understand the instructions in the manual andsupplementary documentation as well as the certificates (depending on theapplication).
‣ Follow instructions and comply with basic conditions.
The operating personnel must fulfill the following requirements:‣ Are instructed and authorized according to the requirements of the task by the facility'sowner-operator.

‣ Follow the instructions in this manual.

2.2

Designated use

Application and media
The measuring device described in these Brief Operating Instructions is intended only forflow measurement of liquids with a minimum conductivity of 5 µS/cm.
Depending on the version ordered, the measuring device can also measure potentiallyexplosive, flammable, poisonous and oxidizing media.
Measuring devices for use in hazardous areas, in hygienic applications or where there is anincreased risk due to process pressure, are labeled accordingly on the nameplate.
To ensure that the measuring device remains in proper condition for the operation time:‣ Keep within the specified pressure and temperature range.
‣ Only use the measuring device in full compliance with the data on the nameplate andthe general conditions listed in the Operating Instructions and supplementary
documentation.
‣ Based on the nameplate, check whether the ordered device is permitted for theintended use in the hazardous area (e.g. explosion protection, pressure vessel safety).
‣ Use the measuring device only for media to which the process-wetted materials are
sufficiently resistant.
‣ If the ambient temperature of the measuring device is outside the atmospherictemperature, it is absolutely essential to comply with the relevant basic conditions as
specified in the device documentation. →  8‣ Protect the measuring device permanently against corrosion from environmental
influences.
Incorrect use
Non-designated use can compromise safety. The manufacturer is not liable for damage
caused by improper or non-designated use.

LWARNING
Danger of breakage due to corrosive or abrasive fluids and ambient conditions!
‣ Verify the compatibility of the process fluid with the sensor material.
‣ Ensure the resistance of all fluid-wetted materials in the process.
‣ Keep within the specified pressure and temperature range.

Endress+Hauser

9Basic safety instructions

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DPNOTICE
Verification for borderline cases:‣ For special fluids and fluids for cleaning, Endress+Hauser is glad to provide assistancein verifying the corrosion resistance of fluid-wetted materials, but does not accept any
warranty or liability as minute changes in the temperature, concentration or level ofcontamination in the process can alter the corrosion resistance properties.
Residual risks

LWARNING
The electronics and the medium may cause the surfaces to heat up. This presents aburn hazard!
‣ For elevated fluid temperatures, ensure protection against contact to prevent burns.

LWARNING
Danger from medium escaping!
For device versions with a rupture disk: medium escaping under pressure can cause injury
or material damage.
‣ Take precautions to prevent injury and material damage if the rupture disk is actuated.

2.3

Workplace safety

For work on and with the device:‣ Wear the required personal protective equipment according to federal/national
regulations.

For welding work on the piping:‣ Do not ground the welding unit via the measuring device.
If working on and with the device with wet hands:‣ Due to the increased risk of electric shock, gloves must be worn.

2.4

Operational safety

Risk of injury.

‣ Operate the device in proper technical condition and fail-safe condition only.
‣ The operator is responsible for interference-free operation of the device.
Conversions to the device
Unauthorized modifications to the device are not permitted and can lead to unforeseeable
dangers.
‣ If, despite this, modifications are required, consult with Endress+Hauser.
RepairTo ensure continued operational safety and reliability,‣ Carry out repairs on the device only if they are expressly permitted.
‣ Observe federal/national regulations pertaining to repair of an electrical device.
‣ Use original spare parts and accessories from Endress+Hauser only.

2.5

Product safety

This measuring device is designed in accordance with good engineering practice to meetstate-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested, and left the factory in a condition inwhich it is safe to operate.

10Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Basic safety instructions

It meets general safety standards and legal requirements. It also complies with the EU
directives listed in the device-specific EU Declaration of Conformity. Endress+Hauser
confirms this by affixing the CE mark to the device.

2.6

IT security

Our warranty is valid only if the device is installed and used as described in the Operating
Instructions. The device is equipped with security mechanisms to protect it against any
inadvertent changes to the settings.
IT security measures, which provide additional protection for the device and associateddata transfer, must be implemented by the operators themselves in line with their security
standards.

2.7

Device-specific IT security

The device offers a range of specific functions to support protective measures on theoperator's side. These functions can be configured by the user and guarantee greater inoperation safety if used correctly. An overview of the most important functions is provided
in the following section.
Function/interface

Factory setting

Recommendation

Write protection via hardware write
protection switch →  11

Not enabled.

On an individual basis following risk
assessment.

Access code(also applies for Web server login or
FieldCare connection) →  12

Not enabled(0000).

Assign a customized access code duringcommissioning.

WLAN(order option in display module)

Enabled.

On an individual basis following risk
assessment.

WLAN security mode

Enabled (WPA2PSK)Do not change.

WLAN passphrase(password) →  12

Serial number

Assign a customized access code duringcommissioning.

WLAN mode

Access Point

On an individual basis following risk
assessment.

Web server→  12

Enabled.

On an individual basis following risk
assessment.

CDI-RJ45 service interface →  13–

On an individual basis following risk
assessment.

2.7.1

Protecting access via hardware write protection

Write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or operating tool(e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be disabled via a write protection switch (DIP switch on
the motherboard). When hardware write protection is enabled, only read access to theparameters is possible.
Hardware write protection is disabled when the device is delivered →  129.

2.7.2

Protecting access via a password

Different passwords are available to protect write access to the device parameters or accessto the device via the WLAN interface.

Endress+Hauser

11Basic safety instructions

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP• User-specific access code
Protect write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or
operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare). Access authorization is clearly regulated
through the use of a user-specific access code.
• WLAN passphrase
The network key protects a connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook ortablet) and the device via the WLAN interface which can be ordered as an option.
• Infrastructure mode
When the device is operated in infrastructure mode, the WLAN passphrase corresponds
to the WLAN passphrase configured on the operator side.
User-specific access code
Write access to the device parameters via the local display, Web browser or operating tool(e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare) can be protected by the modifiable, user-specific access code(→  128).
When the device is delivered, the device does not have an access code and is equivalent to0000 (open).
WLAN passphrase: Operation as WLAN access point
A connection between an operating unit (e.g. notebook or tablet) and the device via the
WLAN interface (→  71), which can be ordered as an optional extra, is protected by
the network key. The WLAN authentication of the network key complies with theIEEE 802.11 standard.
When the device is delivered, the network key is pre-defined depending on the device. It
can be changed via the WLAN settings submenu in the WLAN passphrase parameter(→  122).
Infrastructure mode
A connection between the device and WLAN access point is protected by means of an SSID
and passphrase on the system side. Please contact the relevant system administrator foraccess.
General notes on the use of passwords• The access code and network key supplied with the device should be changed duringcommissioning.
• Follow the general rules for generating a secure password when defining and managing
the access code or network key.
• The user is responsible for the management and careful handling of the access code andnetwork key.
• For information on configuring the access code or on what to do if you lose thepassword, see the "Write protection via access code" section →  128

2.7.3

Access via Web server

The device can be operated and configured via a Web browser with the integrated Web
server (→  63). The connection is via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) or the WLAN
interface.
The Web server is enabled when the device is delivered. The Web server can be disabled if
necessary (e.g. after commissioning) via the Web server functionality parameter.
The device and status information can be hidden on the login page. This prevents
unauthorized access to the information.
For detailed information on device parameters, see:
The "Description of Device Parameters" document →  213.

12

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

2.7.4

Basic safety instructions

Access via service interface (CDI-RJ45)

The device can be connected to a network via the service interface (CDI-RJ45). Devicespecific functions guarantee the secure operation of the device in a network.
The use of relevant industrial standards and guidelines that have been defined by national
and international safety committees, such as IEC/ISA62443 or the IEEE, is recommended.
This includes organizational security measures such as the assignment of accessauthorization as well as technical measures such as network segmentation.

Endress+Hauser

13

Product description

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

3

Product description

The device consists of a transmitter and a sensor.
The device is available as a compact version:
The transmitter and sensor form a mechanical unit.

3.1

Product design
2

1

4

3

un
ter

n
f ne
öf

Ni
Spcht Powan un
Do nu te er
en no ngr
er t op öffn
Ne gizeso pa den when
us s outens vr en
ionir

i sp

la y

e

D

Nicht

I/O

ar
ES

C

–
+
E

5
A0029586

1
1
2
3
4
5

14

Important components of a measuring device
Connection compartment cover
Display module
Transmitter housing
Electronics compartment coverSensorEndress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Incoming acceptance and product identification

4

Incoming acceptance and productidentification

4.1

Incoming acceptance
Are the order codes on thedelivery note (1) and the
product sticker (2) identical?

1
2

1
2

Are the goods undamaged?

Do the nameplate data
match the ordering
information on the delivery
note?

Order code:
Ser. no.:Ext. ord. cd.:

i

i

Date:

Is the document folder
present with accompanying
documents?
Is the optional CD-ROM with
the TechnicalDocumentation present?

• If one of the conditions is not satisfied, contact your Endress+Hauser Sales Center.
• Depending on the device version, the CD-ROM might not be part of the delivery!
The Technical Documentation is available via the Internet or via the Endress+Hauser
Operations App, see the "Product identification" section →  16.

4.2

Product identification

The following options are available for identification of the device:• Nameplate specifications• Order code with breakdown of the device features on the delivery note
• Enter serial numbers from nameplates in the W@M Device Viewer(www.endress.com/deviceviewer): All information about the device is displayed.
• Enter the serial number from nameplates in the Endress+Hauser Operations App or scan
the 2-D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate using the Endress+Hauser Operations
App: All information about the device is displayed.

Endress+Hauser

15

Incoming acceptance and product identification

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to thefollowing:• The "Additional standard documentation on the device"→  8 and "Supplementarydevice-dependent documentation"→  8 sections• The W@M Device Viewer: enter the serial number from the nameplate(www.endress.com/deviceviewer)• The Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate orscan the 2-D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate.

4.2.1

Transmitter nameplate
1 2

3 4 5

Order code:
Ser. no.:Ext. ord. cd.:

20

6

19
7
18
17
16
15
14

8
i

i

Date:

13

12

11

9

10
A0029192

2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

16

Example of a transmitter nameplate
Manufacturing location
Name of the transmitter
Order code
Serial number (ser. no.)Extended order code (Ext. ord. cd.)
Degree of protection
Space for approvals: use in hazardous areas
Electrical connection data: available inputs and outputs
2-D matrix code
Manufacturing date: year-month
Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation
Space for approvals and certificates: e.g. CE mark, C-Tick
Space for degree of protection of connection and electronics compartment when used in hazardous areas
Firmware version (FW) and device revision (Dev.Rev.) from the factory
Space for additional information in the case of special products
Permitted temperature range for cable
Permitted ambient temperature (Ta)Information on cable gland
Available inputs and outputs, supply voltage
Electrical connection data: supply voltage

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

4.2.2

Incoming acceptance and product identification

Sensor nameplate
1

2
3
4
5

Order code:
Ser. no.:Ext. ord. cd.:

6

7
13
8

i

i

9

Date:

12

11

10
A0029205

3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Example of sensor nameplate
Name of the sensor
Manufacturing location
Order code
Serial number (ser. no.)Extended order code (Ext. ord. cd.)
Flow; nominal diameter of the sensor; pressure rating; nominal pressure; system pressure; fluid temperature
range; material of liner and electrodes
Approval information for explosion protection, Pressure Equipment Directive and degree of protection
Document number of safety-related supplementary documentation →  213
2-D matrix code
Manufacturing date: year-month
Flow direction
CE mark, C-Tick
Permitted ambient temperature (Ta)

Order code
The measuring device is reordered using the order code.
Extended order code
• The device type (product root) and basic specifications (mandatory features) arealways listed.
• Of the optional specifications (optional features), only the safety and approvalrelated specifications are listed (e.g. LA). If other optional specifications are alsoordered, these are indicated collectively using the # placeholder symbol (e.g. #LA#).
• If the ordered optional specifications do not include any safety and approval-related
specifications, they are indicated by the + placeholder symbol (e.g. XXXXXX-ABCDE+).

Endress+Hauser

17

Incoming acceptance and product identification

4.2.3
SymbolProline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Symbols on measuring device
MeaningWARNING!
This symbol alerts you to a dangerous situation. Failure to avoid this situation can result in serious
or fatal injury.
Reference to documentation
Refers to the corresponding device documentation.
Protective ground connection
A terminal which must be connected to ground prior to establishing any other connections.

18

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Storage and transport

5

Storage and transport

5.1

Storage conditions

Observe the following notes for storage:‣ Store in the original packaging to ensure protection from shock.
‣ Do not remove protective covers or protective caps installed on process connections.
They prevent mechanical damage to the sealing surfaces and contamination in themeasuring tube.
‣ Protect from direct sunlight to avoid unacceptably high surface temperatures.
‣ Select a storage location where moisture cannot collect in the measuring device as
fungus and bacteria infestation can damage the lining.
‣ Store in a dry and dust-free place.
‣ Do not store outdoors.
Storage temperature→  197

5.2

Transporting the productTransport the measuring device to the measuring point in the original packaging.

A0029252

Do not remove protective covers or caps installed on process connections. They
prevent mechanical damage to the sealing surfaces and contamination in themeasuring tube.

5.2.1

Measuring devices without lifting lugs

LWARNING
Center of gravity of the measuring device is higher than the suspension points of the
webbing slings.
Risk of injury if the measuring device slips.
‣ Secure the measuring device against slipping or turning.
‣ Observe the weight specified on the packaging (stick-on label).

A0029214

Endress+Hauser

19

Storage and transport

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

5.2.2

Measuring devices with lifting lugs

LCAUTION
Special transportation instructions for devices with lifting lugs
‣ Only use the lifting lugs fitted on the device or flanges to transport the device.
‣ The device must always be secured at two lifting lugs at least.

5.2.3

Transporting with a fork lift

If transporting in wood crates, the floor structure enables the crates to be lifted lengthwise
or at both sides using a forklift.

LCAUTION
Risk of damaging the magnetic coil
‣ If transporting by forklift, do not lift the sensor by the metal casing.
‣ This would buckle the casing and damage the internal magnetic coils.

A0029319

5.3

Packaging disposal

All packaging materials are environmentally friendly and 100 % recyclable:• Outer packaging of device
Polymer stretch wrap that complies with EU Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS)• Packaging– Wooden crate treated in accordance with ISPM 15 standard, confirmed by IPPC logo
– Cardboard box in accordance with European packaging guideline 94/62EC,
recyclability confirmed by Resy symbol• Carrying and securing materials– Disposable plastic pallet– Plastic straps– Plastic adhesive strips• Filler material
Paper pads

20

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Installation

6

Installation

6.1

Installation conditions

6.1.1

Mounting positionhMounting location

A0029343

Preferably install the sensor in an ascending pipe, and ensure a sufficient distance to thenext pipe elbow: h ≥ 2 × DN
Installation in down pipes
Install a siphon with a vent valve downstream of the sensor in down pipes whose length h≥ 5 m (16.4 ft). This precaution is to avoid low pressure and the consequent risk ofdamage to the measuring tube. This measure also prevents the system losing prime.
1h2

A0028981

412hInstallation in a down pipe
Vent valve
Pipe siphon
Length of down pipe

Installation in partially filled pipes
A partially filled pipe with a gradient necessitates a drain-type configuration.

N

³2

xD

N

³5

xD

A0029257

Endress+Hauser

21

Installation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

For heavy sensors DN ≥ 350 (14")

A0016276

Orientation
The direction of the arrow on the sensor nameplate helps you to install the sensor
according to the flow direction (direction of medium flow through the piping).
Orientation
A

Recommendation

Vertical orientation

A0015591

B

1)

Horizontal orientation, transmitter at
top
A0015589

C2) 3)

Horizontal orientation, transmitter atbottom
A0015590

D

Horizontal orientation, transmitter atside
A0015592

1)
2)
3)

Applications with low process temperatures may decrease the ambient temperature. To maintain theminimum ambient temperature for the transmitter, this orientation is recommended.
Applications with high process temperatures may increase the ambient temperature. To maintain the
maximum ambient temperature for the transmitter, this orientation is recommended.
To prevent the electronics module from overheating in the case of a sharp rise in temperature (e.g. CIP or
SIP processes), install the device with the transmitter component pointing downwards.

Horizontal• Ideally, the measuring electrode plane should be horizontal. This prevents brief
insulation of the two measuring electrodes by entrained air bubbles.
• Empty pipe detection only works if the transmitter housing is pointing upwards asotherwise there is no guarantee that the empty pipe detection function will actually
respond to a partially filled or empty measuring tube.

22

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Installation

1
2

2
3
A0029344

1
2
3

EPD electrode for empty pipe detection
Measuring electrodes for signal detection
Reference electrode for potential equalization

Measuring devices with tantalum or platinum electrodes can be ordered without an
EPD electrode. In this case, empty pipe detection is performed via the measuring
electrodes.
Inlet and outlet runs
If possible, install the sensor upstream from fittings such as valves, T-pieces or elbows.
Observe the following inlet and outlet runs to comply with accuracy specifications:≥ 5 × DN

≥ 2 × DN

A0028997

Installation dimensions
For the dimensions and installation lengths of the device, see the "Technical
Information" document, "Mechanical construction" section.

6.1.2

Environment- and process-related requirements

Ambient temperature range
Transmitter

Standard: –40 to +60 °C (–40 to +140 °F)

Local display–20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F), the readability of the display may be
impaired at temperatures outside the temperature range.

Sensor• Process connection material, carbon steel:–10 to +60 °C (+14 to +140 °F)• Process connection material, stainless steel:–40 to +60 °C (–40 to +140 °F)

Liner

Do not exceed or fall below the permitted temperature range of the liner .

If operating outdoors:• Install the measuring device in a shady location.
• Avoid direct sunlight, particularly in warm climatic regions.
• Avoid direct exposure to weather conditions.

Endress+Hauser

23

Installation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

System pressure

A0028777

Never install the sensor on the pump suction side in order to avoid the risk of low pressure,and thus damage to the liner.
Furthermore, install pulse dampers if reciprocating, diaphragm or peristaltic pumps
are used.
• Information on the liner's resistance to partial vacuum →  200• Information on the shock resistance of the measuring system →  198• Information on the vibration resistance of the measuring system →  198
Vibrations

L
A0029004

5

Measures to avoid device vibrations (L > 10 m (33 ft))

In the event of very strong vibrations, the pipe and sensor must be supported and fixed.
• Information on the shock resistance of the measuring system →  198• Information on the vibration resistance of the measuring system →  198
Thermal insulation
If process fluids are very hot, it is necessary to insulate pipes in order to reduce energy loss
and to prevent individuals from accidentally coming into contact with hot pipes. Pleaseobserve the applicable standards and guidelines for insulating pipes.
A housing support/an extended neck is used for heat dissipation:• Devices with the order code for "Lining", option B "PFA high-temperature" always
come with a housing support.
• In the case of all other devices, a housing support can be ordered via the order codefor "Sensor option", option CG "Sensor extended neck".

LWARNING
Electronics overheating on account of thermal insulation!
‣ The housing support is used for heat dissipation and must be completely free (i.e.
uncovered). At the very maximum, the sensor insulation may extend as far as theupper edge of the two sensor half-shells.

24

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Installation

max.

A0031216

Adapters
Suitable adapters to DIN EN 545 (double-flange reducers) can be used to install the sensor
in larger-diameter pipes. The resultant increase in the rate of flow improves measuring
accuracy with very slow-moving fluids. The nomogram shown here can be used to
calculate the pressure loss caused by reducers and expanders.
The nomogram only applies to liquids with a viscosity similar to that of water.
1.

Calculate the ratio of the diameters d/D.

2.

From the nomogram read off the pressure loss as a function of flow velocity(downstream from the reduction) and the d/D ratio.
100 [mbar]
8 m/s
7 m/s
6 m/s
5 m/s
4 m/s

10

3 m/s

max. 8°

2 m/s

d

D
1 m/s

0.5

1

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

d/D
A0029002

Endress+Hauser

25

Installation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

6.1.3

Special mounting instructions

Protective cover
280 (11.0)
134 (5.3)

12 (0.47)

30 (1.18)

48 (1.9)

146 (5.75)

255 (10.0)

A0029553

6.2

Mounting the measuring device

6.2.1

Required tools

For sensor
For flanges and other process connections: Corresponding mounting tools

6.2.2

Preparing the measuring device

1.

Remove all remaining transport packaging.

2.

Remove any protective covers or protective caps present from the sensor.

3.

Remove stick-on label on the electronics compartment cover.

6.2.3

Mounting the sensor

LWARNING
Danger due to improper process sealing!
‣ Ensure that the inside diameters of the gaskets are greater than or equal to that of theprocess connections and piping.
‣ Ensure that the gaskets are clean and undamaged.
‣ Install the gaskets correctly.

26

1.

Ensure that the direction of the arrow on the sensor matches the flow direction of
the medium.

2.

To ensure compliance with device specifications, install the measuring device
between the pipe flanges in a way that it is centered in the measurement section.

3.

If using ground disks, comply with the Installation Instructions provided.

4.

Observe required screw tightening torques →  27.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

5.

Installation

Install the measuring device or turn the transmitter housing so that the cable entries
do not point upwards.
A0029263

Mounting the seals

LCAUTION
An electrically conductive layer could form on the inside of the measuring tube!
Risk of measuring signal short circuit.
‣ Do not use electrically conductive sealing compounds such as graphite.
Comply with the following instructions when installing seals:
1.

For DIN flanges: only use seals according to DIN EN 1514-1.

2.

For "PFA" lining: generally additional seals are not required.

3.

For "PTFE" lining: generally additional seals are not required.

Mounting the ground cable/ground disks
Comply with the information on potential equalization and detailed mounting instructions
for the use of ground cables/ground disks .
Screw tightening torques
Please note the following:• The screw tightening torques listed below apply only to lubricated threads and to pipes
not subjected to tensile stress.
• Tighten the screws uniformly and in diagonally opposite sequence.
• Overtightening the screws will deform the sealing faces or damage the seals.
Screw tightening torques for EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501), PN 10/16/25/40
NominaldiameterPressure rating

ScrewsFlange thickness

[mm]

[bar]

[mm]

[mm]

PTFE

PFA

15

PN 40

4 × M12

16

11

–

25

PN 40

4 × M12

18

26

20

32

PN 40

4 × M16

18

41

35

40

PN 40

4 × M16

18

52

47

50

PN 40

4 × M16

20

65

59

1)

PN 16

8 × M16

18

43

40

65

PN 40

8 × M16

22

43

40

80

PN 16

8 × M16

20

53

48

80

PN 40

8 × M16

24

53

48

100

PN 16

8 × M16

20

57

51

100

PN 40

8 × M20

24

78

70

125

PN 16

8 × M16

22

75

67

65

Endress+Hauser

Max. screw tightening torque
[Nm]

27

Installation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

NominaldiameterPressure rating

ScrewsFlange thickness

[mm]

[bar]

[mm]

[mm]

PTFE

PFA

125

PN 40

8 × M24

26

111

99

150

PN 16

8 × M20

22

99

85

150

PN 40

8 × M24

28

136

120

200

PN 10

8 × M20

24

141

101

200

PN 16

12 × M20

24

94

67

200

PN 25

12 × M24

30

138

105

250

PN 10

12 × M20

26

110

–

250

PN 16

12 × M24

26

131

–

250

PN 25

12 × M27

32

200

–

300

PN 10

12 × M20

26

125

–

300

PN 16

12 × M24

28

179

–

300

PN 25

16 × M27

34

204

–

350

PN 10

16 × M20

26

188

–

350

PN 16

16 × M24

30

254

–

350

PN 25

16 × M30

38

380

–

400

PN 10

16 × M24

26

260

–

400

PN 16

16 × M27

32

330

–

400

PN 25

16 × M33

40

488

–

450

PN 10

20 × M24

28

235

–

450

PN 16

20 × M27

40

300

–

450

PN 25

20 × M33

46

385

–

500

PN 10

20 × M24

28

265

–

500

PN 16

20 × M30

34

448

–

500

PN 25

20 × M33

48

533

–

600

PN 10

20 × M27

28

345

–

1)

PN 16

20 × M33

36

658

–

600

PN 25

20 × M36

58

731

–

600

1)

Max. screw tightening torque[Nm]

Designed acc. to EN 1092-1 (not to DIN 2501)

Screw tightening torques for EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501), PN 10/16/25, P245GH/stainless;calculated according to EN 1591-1:2014 for flanges as per EN 1092-1:2013

28

Nominal diameter

Pressure rating

ScrewsFlange thickness

Nom. screw
tightening torque
[Nm]

[mm]

[bar]

[mm]

[mm]

PTFE

350

PN 10

16 × M20

26

60

350

PN 16

16 × M24

30

115

350

PN 25

16 × M30

38

220

400

PN 10

16 × M24

26

90

400

PN 16

16 × M27

32

155

400

PN 25

16 × M33

40

290

450

PN 10

20 × M24

28

90

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Installation

Nominal diameter

Pressure rating

ScrewsFlange thickness

Nom. screw
tightening torque
[Nm]

[mm]

[bar]

[mm]

[mm]

PTFE

450

PN 16

20 × M27

34

155

450

PN 25

20 × M33

46

290

500

PN 10

20 × M24

28

100

500

PN 16

20 × M30

36

205

500

PN 25

20 × M33

48

345

600

PN 10

20 × M27

30

150

600

PN 16

20 × M33

40

310

600

PN 25

20 × M36

48

500

Screw tightening torques for ASME B16.5, Class 150/300
Nominal diameter

Endress+Hauser

Pressure rating

ScrewsMax. screw tightening torque [Nm]([lbf · ft])

[mm]

[in]

[psi]

[in]

PTFE

PFA

15

½

Class 150

4×½

6 (4)

– (–)

15

½

Class 300

4×½

6 (4)

– (–)

25

1

Class 150

4×½

11 (8)

10 (7)

25

1

Class 300

4 × 5/8

14 (10)12 (9)

40

1½

Class 150

4×½

24 (18)21 (15)40

1½

Class 300

4×¾

34 (25)31 (23)50

2Class 150

4 × 5/8

47 (35)44 (32)50

2Class 300

8 × 5/8

23 (17)22 (16)80

3Class 150

4 × 5/8

79 (58)67 (49)80

3Class 300

8×¾

47 (35)42 (31)100

4Class 150

8 × 5/8

56 (41)50 (37)100

4Class 300

8×¾

67 (49)59 (44)150

6Class 150

8×¾

106 (78)

86 (63)150

6Class 300

12 × ¾

73 (54)67 (49)200

8Class 150

8×¾

143 (105)109 (80)250

10Class 150

12 × 7/8

135 (100)

– (–)

300

12

Class 150

12 × 7/8

178 (131)

– (–)

350

14

Class 150

12 × 1260 (192)

– (–)

400

16

Class 150

16 × 1246 (181)

– (–)

450

18

Class 150

16 × 1 1/8

371 (274)

– (–)

500

20

Class 150

20 × 1 1/8

341 (252)

– (–)

600

24

Class 150

20 × 1 ¼

477 (352)

– (–)

29

Installation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Screw tightening torques for JIS B2220, 10/20K
Nominal diameter

Pressure rating

ScrewsMax. screw tightening torque [Nm]

[mm]

[bar]

[mm]

PTFE

PFA

25

10K

4 × M16

32

27

25

20K

4 × M16

32

27

32

10K

4 × M16

38

–

32

20K

4 × M16

38

–

40

10K

4 × M16

41

37

40

20K

4 × M16

41

37

50

10K

4 × M16

54

46

50

20K

8 × M16

27

23

65

10K

4 × M16

74

63

65

20K

8 × M16

37

31

80

10K

8 × M16

38

32

80

20K

8 × M20

57

46

100

10K

8 × M16

47

38

100

20K

8 × M20

75

58

125

10K

8 × M20

80

66

125

20K

8 × M22

121

103

150

10K

8 × M20

99

81

150

20K

12 × M22

108

72

200

10K

12 × M20

82

54

200

20K

12 × M22

121

88

250

10K

12 × M22

133

–

250

20K

12 × M24

212

–

300

10K

16 × M22

99

–

300

20K

16 × M24

183–

Screw tightening torques for JIS B2220, 10/20K

30

Nominal diameter

Pressure rating

ScrewsNom. screw tightening torque [Nm]

[mm]

[bar]

[mm]

PUR

HG

350

10K

16 × M22

109

109

350

20K

16 × M30×3

217

217

400

10K

16 × M24

163

163

400

20K

16 × M30×3

258

258

450

10K

16 × M24

155

155

450

20K

16 × M30×3

272

272

500

10K

16 × M24

183

183

500

20K

16 × M30×3

315

315

600

10K

16 × M30

235

235

600

20K

16 × M36×3

381

381

700

10K

16 × M30

300

300

750

10K

16 × M30

339

339

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Installation

Screw tightening torques for AS 2129, Table E
Nominal diameterScrewsMax. screw tightening torque
[Nm]

[mm]

[mm]

PTFE

25

4 × M122150

4 × M16

42

Screw tightening torques for AS 4087, PN 16
Nominal diameterScrewsMax. screw tightening torque
[Nm]

[mm]

[mm]

PTFE

50

4 × M16

42

6.2.4

Turning the transmitter housing

To provide easier access to the connection compartment or display module, the transmitter
housing can be turned.

4.

n
f ne
öf

Nicht

Nicht

un
te r

un
te r

n
f ne
öf
ES

ES

C

C

–

–

+

+

E

e

e

E

ar

ar

2.

3 mm

1.

4 mm

3.
A0029993

1.

Depending on the device version: Loosen the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.

2.

Unscrew the connection compartment cover.

3.

Release the fixing screw.

4.

Turn the housing to the desired position.

5.

Firmly tighten the securing screw.

6.

Screw on the connection compartment cover7.

Depending on the device version: Attach the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.

6.2.5

Turning the display module

The display module can be turned to optimize display readability and operability.

Endress+Hauser

31Installation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

n
f ne
öf

Nicht

Nicht

un
te r

un
te r

n
f ne
öf
ES

ES

C

C

–

–

+

+

ES

C

E

–

E

ar

e

E

ar

2.

3 mm

1.

e

+

3.
A0030035

1.

Depending on the device version: Loosen the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.

2.

Unscrew the connection compartment cover.

3.

Turn the display module to the desired position: max. 8 × 45° in each direction.

4.

Screw on the connection compartment cover.

5.

Depending on the device version: Attach the securing clamp of the connection
compartment cover.

6.3

Post-installation check

Is the device undamaged (visual inspection)?



Does the measuring device conform to the measuring point specifications?
For example:• Process temperature• Process pressure (refer to the section on "Pressure-temperature ratings" in the "Technical
Information" document)• Ambient temperature• Measuring range

Has the correct orientation for the sensor been selected ?
• According to sensor type
• According to medium temperature• According to medium properties (outgassing, with entrained solids)

32



Does the arrow on the sensor nameplate match the direction of flow of the fluid through thepiping ?



Are the measuring point identification and labeling correct (visual inspection)?

Is the device adequately protected from precipitation and direct sunlight?

Have the fixing screws been tightened with the correct tightening torque?

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

7

Electrical connection

Electrical connection

NOTICEThe measuring device does not have an internal circuit breaker.
‣ For this reason, assign the measuring device a switch or power-circuit breaker so thatthe power supply line can be easily disconnected from the mains.
‣ Although the measuring device is equipped with a fuse, additional overcurrent
protection (maximum 10 A) should be integrated into the system installation.

7.1

Connection conditions

7.1.1

Required tools• For cable entries: Use corresponding tools• For securing clamp: Allen key 3 mm
• Wire stripper• When using stranded cables: Crimper for wire end ferrule• For removing cables from terminal: Flat blade screwdriver ≤ 3 mm (0.12 in)

7.1.2

Requirements for connecting cable

The connecting cables provided by the customer must fulfill the following requirements.
Electrical safety
In accordance with applicable federal/national regulations.
Protective ground cable
Cable ≥2.08 mm2 (14 AWG)
The grounding impedance must be less than 1 Ω.
Permitted temperature range• The installation guidelines that apply in the country of installation must be observed.
• The cables must be suitable for the minimum and maximum temperatures to be
expected.
Power supply cableStandard installation cable is sufficient.
Signal cable
PROFIBUS DP
The IEC 61158 standard specifies two types of cable (A and B) for the bus line which canbe used for every transmission rate. Cable type A is recommended.

Endress+Hauser

Cable typeA

Characteristic impedance

135 to 165 Ω at a measuring frequency of 3 to 20 MHz

Cable capacitance< 30 pF/mWire cross-section> 0.34 mm2 (22 AWG)

Cable type

Twisted pairs

Loop resistance≤110 Ω/km

33

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Signal damping

Max. 9 dB over the entire length of the cable cross-section

ShieldCopper braided shielding or braided shielding with foil shield. When grounding
the cable shield, observe the grounding concept of the plant.

For further information on planning and installing PROFIBUS networks see:Operating Instructions "PROFIBUS DP/PA: Guidelines for planning and commissioning"(BA00034S)
Current output 0/4 to 20 mA
Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Pulse/frequency/switch output
Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Relay output
Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Current input 0/4 to 20 mA
Standard installation cable is sufficient.
Status inputStandard installation cable is sufficient.
Cable diameter• Cable glands supplied:
M20 × 1.5 with cable ⌀ 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in)• Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules.
Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG).
Requirements for the connecting cable - Remote display and operating module
DKX001
Optionally available connecting cable
A cable is supplied depending on the order option• Order code for measuring device: order code 030 for "Display; operation", option Oor• Order code for measuring device: order code 030 for "Display; operation", option M
and• Order code for DKX001: order code 040 for "Cable", option A, B, D, E

34Standard cable2 × 2 × 0.34 mm2 (22 AWG) PVC cable with common shield (2 pairs, pairstranded)

Flame resistanceAccording to DIN EN 60332-1-2

Oil-resistanceAccording to DIN EN 60811-2-1

ShieldingTin-plated copper-braid, optical cover ≥ 85 %Capacitance: core/shield≤200 pF/m

L/R≤24 µH/Ω

Available cable length

5 m (15 ft)/10 m (35 ft)/20 m (65 ft)/30 m (100 ft)

Operating temperature

When mounted in a fixed position: –50 to +105 °C (–58 to +221 °F); when cable
can move freely: –25 to +105 °C (–13 to +221 °F)

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Electrical connection

Standard cable - customer-specific cableNo cable is supplied, and it must be provided by the customer (up to max.
300 m (1 000 ft)) for the following order option:
Order code for DKX001: Order code 040 for "Cable", option 1 "None, provided by customer,
max 300 m"
A standard cable can be used as the connecting cable.

Endress+HauserStandard cable4 cores (2 pairs); pair-stranded with common shield

ShieldingTin-plated copper-braid, optical cover ≥ 85 %Capacitance: core/shield

Maximum 1 000 nF for Zone 1, Class I, Division 1

L/R

Maximum 24 µH/Ω for Zone 1, Class I, Division 1

Cable length

Maximum 300 m (1 000 ft), see the following table

Cross-section

Max. cable length for use in
Non-hazardous area,
Ex Zone 2, Class I, Division 2
Ex Zone 1, Class I, Division 1

0.34 mm2 (22 AWG)

80 m (270 ft)

0.50 mm2 (20 AWG)

120 m (400 ft)

0.75 mm2 (18 AWG)

180 m (600 ft)

1.00 mm2 (17 AWG)

240 m (800 ft)

1.50 mm2 (15 AWG)

300 m (1 000 ft)

35Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

7.1.3

Terminal assignment

Transmitter: supply voltage, input/outputs
The terminal assignment of the inputs and outputs depends on the individual orderversion of the device. The device-specific terminal assignment is documented on anadhesive label in the terminal cover.
Supply voltage
1 (+)

2 (–)

Input/output 1
26 (B)

27 (A)

Input/output 2
24 (+)

25 (–)

Input/output 3
22 (+)

23 (–)

Device-specific terminal assignment: adhesive label in terminal cover.

Terminal assignment of the remote display and operating module →  41.

7.1.4

Shielding and grounding

Optimum electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of the fieldbus system can only beguaranteed if the system components and, in particular, the lines are shielded and theshield forms as complete a cover as possible. A shield coverage of 90% is ideal.
• To ensure an optimum EMC protective effect, connect the shield as often as possible to
the reference ground.
• For reasons of explosion protection, you should refrain from grounding however.
To comply with both requirements, the fieldbus system allows three different types ofshielding:• Shielding at both ends.
• Shielding at one end on the feed side with capacitance termination at the field device.
• Shielding at one end on the feed side.
Experience shows that the best results with regard to EMC are achieved in most cases ininstallations with one-sided shielding on the feed side (without capacitance termination at
the field device). Appropriate measures with regard to input wiring must be taken to allow
unrestricted operation when EMC interference is present. These measures have beentaken into account for this device. Operation in the event of disturbance variables as per
NAMUR NE21 is thus guaranteed.
Where applicable, national installation regulations and guidelines must be observed
during the installation!
Where there are large differences in potential between the individual grounding points,
only one point of the shielding is connected directly with the reference ground. In systems
without potential equalization, therefore, cable shielding of fieldbus systems should only
be grounded on one side, for example at the fieldbus supply unit or at safety barriers.
NOTICEIn systems without potential matching, the multiple grounding of the cable shieldcauses mains frequency equalizing currents!
Damage to the bus cable shield.
‣ Only ground the bus cable shield to either the local ground or the protective ground at
one end. Insulate the shield that is not connected.

36

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Electrical connection

1

2

3

4
5
5
4
5
5

5
7

6
A0036639

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Controller (e.g. PLC)
Cable shieldT-box
Measuring device
Local grounding
Bus terminator
Potential matching line

7.1.5

Preparing the measuring device

NOTICE
Insufficient sealing of the housing!
Operational reliability of the measuring device could be compromised.
‣ Use suitable cable glands corresponding to the degree of protection.
1.

Remove dummy plug if present.

2.

If the measuring device is supplied without cable glands:
Provide suitable cable gland for corresponding connecting cable.

3.

If the measuring device is supplied with cable glands:
Observe requirements for connecting cables →  33.

7.2

Connecting the measuring device

NOTICE
Limitation of electrical safety due to incorrect connection!
‣ Have electrical connection work carried out by appropriately trained specialists only.
‣ Observe applicable federal/national installation codes and regulations.
‣ Comply with local workplace safety regulations.
‣ Always connect the protective ground cable  before connecting additional cables.
‣ For use in potentially explosive atmospheres, observe the information in the devicespecific Ex documentation.

Endress+Hauser

37

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

7.2.1

Connecting the transmitter
1
2
3
4

A0026781

1
2
3

4

Terminal connection for supply voltage
Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output
Terminal connection for signal transmission, input/output or terminal connection for network connection via
service interface (CDI-RJ45); optional: connection for external WLAN antenna or remote display andoperating module DKX001
Protective earth (PE)

3.
n
f ne
öf

Nicht

Nicht

un
ter

un
te r

n
f ne
öf
ES
C

ES

C

–

–

+

+

E

E
ES

C

+

ar

ar

4.

1.

3 mm

2.

e

e

–

E

3.
A0029813

1.

Loosen the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.

2.

Unscrew the connection compartment cover.

3.

Squeeze the tabs of the display module holder together.

4.

Remove the display module holder.

Ni
Spcht Powan un
Do nu te er
en no ngrer töfNe gi op fn
so pa zeden when
us s outens vr en
ionir

un
te r

Nicht

I/O

e

un
te r

6.

er
Powr ente fn nun g öf whe
enichtnnunNpat op
d vrir
S nozeDoergis ouionen patens
Neus
so
I/O

e

Nicht

I/O

n
f ne
öf

n
f ne
öf

Ni
Spcht Powan un
Do nu te er
en no ngrer töfNe gi op fn
so pa zeden when
us s outens vr en
ionir

ar

ar

ES

ES

C

–

C

–
+

+
E

E

5.
A0029814

38

5.

Attach the holder to the edge of the electronics compartment.

6.

Open the terminal cover.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Electrical connection8.
7.

10 (0.4)

Nicht

un
ter

n
f ne
öf

e

mm (in)
ar

ES

C

–
+

9.

E

A0029815

7.

Push the cable through the cable entry . To ensure tight sealing, do not remove thesealing ring from the cable entry.

8.

Strip the cable and cable ends. In the case of stranded cables, also fit ferrules.

9.

Connect the protective ground.

11.

n
f ne
öf

Nicht

un
te r

22 mm

e

24 mm
ar
ES

C

–
+
E

10.
A0029816

10. Connect the cable in accordance with the terminal assignment .
 Signal cable terminal assignment: The device-specific terminal assignment isdocumented on an adhesive label in the terminal cover.
Supply voltage terminal assignment: Adhesive label in the terminal cover or→  36.
11. Firmly tighten the cable glands.
 This concludes the cable connection process.
12. Close the terminal cover.
13. Fit the display module holder in the electronics compartment.
14. Screw on the connection compartment cover.
15. Secure the securing clamp of the connection compartment cover.

Endress+Hauser

39

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Removing a cable

3 (0.12)1.

2.

A0029598640

Engineering unit mm (in)1.

To remove a cable from the terminal, use a flat-blade screwdriver to push the slot
between the two terminal holes2.

while simultaneously pulling the cable end out of the terminal.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Electrical connection

7.2.2

Connecting the remote display and operating module DKX001

The remote display and operating module DKX001 is available as an optional extra→  185.

Gnd

Vcc• The measuring device is always supplied with a dummy cover when the remote
display and operating module DKX001 is ordered directly with the measuring
device. Display or operation at the transmitter is not possible in this case.
• If ordered subsequently, the remote display and operating module DKX001 may not
be connected at the same time as the existing measuring device display module.
Only one display or operation unit may be connected to the transmitter at any one
time.

A

B

81 82 83 84
1
2

3

Gnd

4
5

Vcc

81 82 83 84
A

B

A0027518

1
2
3
4
5

Remote display and operating module DKX001
Protective earth (PE)Connecting cable
Measuring device
Protective earth (PE)

7.3

Ensuring potential equalization

7.3.1

Requirements

LCAUTION
Electrode damage can result in the complete failure of the device!
‣ Same electrical potential for the fluid and sensor‣ Company-internal grounding concepts‣ Pipe material and grounding

7.3.2

Connection example, standard scenario

Metal, grounded pipe

A00163157

Endress+Hauser

Potential equalization via measuring tube

41

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

7.3.3

Connection example in special situations

Unlined and ungrounded metal pipe
This connection method also applies in situations where:• The customary potential equalization is not used
• Equalizing currents are present
Copper wire, at least 6 mm2 (0.0093 in2)

Ground cable

DN ≤ 300

DN ≥ 350
A0029338

8

Potential equalization via ground terminal and pipe flanges

1.

Connect both sensor flanges to the pipe flange via a ground cable and ground them.

2.

If DN ≤ 300 (12"): Mount the ground cable directly on the conductive flange coatingof the sensor with the flange screws.

3.

If DN ≥ 350 (14"): Mount the ground cable directly on the metal transport bracket.
Observe screw tightening torques: see the Sensor Brief Operating Instructions.

4.

Connect the connection housing of the transmitter or sensor to ground potential bymeans of the ground terminal provided for the purpose.

Plastic pipe or pipe with insulating liner
This connection method also applies in situations where:• The customary potential equalization is not used
• Equalizing currents are present
Ground cable

Copper wire, at least 6 mm2 (0.0093 in2)

A0029339

9

Potential equalization via ground terminal and ground disks

1.

Connect the ground disks to the ground terminal via the ground cable.

2.

Connect the ground disks to ground potential.

Pipe with a cathodic protection unit
This connection method is only used if the following two conditions are met:
• Metal pipe without liner or pipe with electrically conductive liner• Cathodic protection is integrated in the personal protection equipment
42

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Electrical connection

Copper wire, at least 6 mm2 (0.0093 in2)

Ground cable+–

A0029340

Prerequisite: The sensor is installed in the pipe in a way that provides electrical insulation.
1.

Connect the two flanges of the pipe to one another via a ground cable.

2.

Guide the shield of the signal lines through a capacitor.

3.

Connect the measuring device to the power supply such that it is floating in relation
to the protective ground (isolation transformer).

7.4

Special connection instructions

7.4.1

Connection examples

PROFIBUS DP
1

2

3

A
B

A
4
B

A
4
B

A0028765

 10
1
2
3
4

Connection example for PROFIBUS DP, non-hazardous area and Zone 2/Div. 2

Control system (e.g. PLC)
Cable shield: the cable shield must be grounded at both ends to comply with EMC requirements; observe cablespecifications
Distribution box
Transmitter

If baud rates > 1.5 MBaud an EMC cable entry must be used and the cable shield must
continue as far as the terminal wherever possible.

Endress+Hauser

43Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Current output 4-20 mA
1

2

3
4...20 mA
A0028758

 11
1
2
3

Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (active)

Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC)
Analog display unit: observe maximum load
Transmitter

1

2

3

4
4...20 mA

A0028759

 12
1
2
3
4

Connection example for 4-20 mA current output (passive)

Automation system with current input (e.g. PLC)
Active barrier for power supply (e.g. RN221N)
Analog display unit: observe maximum load
Transmitter

Pulse/frequency output

1

2

3

12345
A0028761

 13
1
2
3

44

Connection example for pulse/frequency output (passive)

Automation system with pulse/frequency input (e.g. PLC)
Power supply
Transmitter: Observe input values →  191

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Electrical connection

Switch output

1

2

3

A0028760

 14
1
2
3

Connection example for switch output (passive)

Automation system with switch input (e.g. PLC)
Power supply
Transmitter: Observe input values →  191

Relay output

1

2

3

A0028760

 15
1
2
3

Connection example for relay output (passive)

Automation system with relay input (e.g. PLC)
Power supply
Transmitter: Observe input values →  192

Current input
1

2

3

4

A0028915

 16
1
2
3
4

Endress+Hauser

Connection example for 4 to 20 mA current input

Power supply
Terminal box
External measuring device (for reading in pressure or temperature, for instance)
Transmitter

45

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Status input

1

2

3

A0028764

 17
1
2
3

Connection example for status input

Automation system with status output (e.g. PLC)
Power supply
Transmitter

7.5

Hardware settings

7.5.1

Setting the device address

The address must always be configured for a PROFIBUS DP/PA device. The valid address
range is between 1 and 126. In a PROFIBUS DP/PA network, each address can only be
assigned once. If an address is not configured correctly, the device is not recognized by themaster. All measuring devices are delivered from the factory with the device address 126
and with the software addressing method.
Hardware addressing
1.
128 not used
64
32
16
8
4
2
1

PROFIBUS address

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

A0029637

Set the desired device address using the DIP switches in the connection compartment.
2.
Off On1
2
3
4A0029633

To switch addressing from software addressing to hardware addressing: set the DIP
switch to On.
 The change of device address takes effect after 10 seconds. The device isrestarted.
46

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Electrical connection

Software addressing‣ To switch addressing from hardware addressing to software addressing: set DIP switch
No. 4 to Off.
 The device address configured in the Device address parameter (→  94) takes
effect after 10 seconds. The device is restarted.

7.5.2

Enabling the terminating resistor

To avoid incorrect communication transmission caused by impedance mismatch, terminate
the PROFIBUS DP cable correctly at the start and end of the bus segment.
• If the device is operated with a baud rate of 1.5 MBaud and under:
For the last transmitter on the bus, terminate by setting DIP switch 3 (bus termination)
to ON.
• For baud rates > 1.5 MBaud:Due to the capacitance load of the user and the line reflections generated as a result,
ensure that an external bus terminator is used.
It is generally advisable to use an external bus terminator as the entire segment canfail if a device that is terminated internally is defective.

‣
Off On1
2
3
4A0029632

Set DIP switch No. 3 to ON.

7.5.3

Activating the default IP address

The default IP address 192.168.1.212 can be activated by DIP switch.
Activating the default IP address via the DIP switch
Risk of electric shock when opening the transmitter housing.

‣ Before opening the transmitter housing:‣ Disconnect the device from the power supply.

Off On1
2
3
4A0034499

Endress+Hauser

1.

Depending on the housing version, loosen the securing clamp or fixing screw of the
housing cover.

2.

Depending on the housing version, unscrew or open the housing cover anddisconnect the local display from the main electronics module where necessary .

47

Electrical connection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

3.

Set DIP switch No. 2 on the I/O electronics module from OFF → ON.

4.

Reverse the removal procedure to reassemble the transmitter.

5.

Reconnect the device to the power supply.
 The default IP address is used once the device is restarted.

7.6

Ensuring the degree of protection

The measuring device fulfills all the requirements for the IP66/67 degree of protection,
Type 4X enclosure.
To guarantee IP66/67 degree of protection, Type 4X enclosure, carry out the following
steps after the electrical connection:
1.

Check that the housing seals are clean and fitted correctly.

2.

Dry, clean or replace the seals if necessary.

3.

Tighten all housing screws and screw covers.

4.

Firmly tighten the cable glands.

5.

To ensure that moisture does not enter the cable entry:
Route the cable so that it loops down before the cable entry ("water trap").
A0029278

48

6.

Insert dummy plugs into unused cable entries.

7.7

Post-connection check

Are cables or the device undamaged (visual inspection)?



Do the cables used meet the requirements?

Do the cables have adequate strain relief?



Are all the cable glands installed, firmly tightened and leak-tight? Cable run with "water trap"→  48?



If supply voltage is present, do values appear on the display module?

Is the potential equalization established correctly ?

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Operation options

8

Operation options

8.1

Overview of operation options

ESC

-

+

1

E

2

3

4

5

6
A0034513

1
2
3
4
5
6

Endress+Hauser

Local operation via display module
Computer with Web browser (e.g. Internet Explorer) or with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare, AMS
Device Manager, SIMATIC PDM)
Field Xpert SFX350 or SFX370
Field Xpert SMT70
Mobile handheld terminal
Control system (e.g. PLC)

49

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

8.2

Structure and function of the operating menu

8.2.1

Structure of the operating menu

For an overview of the operating menu for experts: "Description of Device Parameters"
document supplied with the device→  213

Operating menu for operators and maintenances
Language
Operatation!
Language

Operator

Parameter 1
Parameter n
Submenu 1
Submenu n
Setup

Device tag

Wizard n / Parameter nAdvanced setup

Enter access code
Parameter 1

Task-oriented

Maintenance

Wizard 1 / Parameter 1

Parameter n
Submenu 1
Submenu n
Diagnostics

Parameter 1
Parameter n
Submenu 1
Submenu nOperating menu for experts
ExpertAccess status display
Parameter n

Sensor
Input
OutputCommunication

Function-oriented

ExpertSystemApplication
Diagnostics

A0018237-EN

 18

50

Schematic structure of the operating menu

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

8.2.2

Operation options

Operating philosophy

The individual parts of the operating menu are assigned to certain user roles (operator,
maintenance etc.). Each user role contains typical tasks within the device lifecycle.
Menu/parameter
Languagetask-oriented

Operation
Setup

User role and tasks

Content/meaning

Role "Operator", "Maintenance"
Tasks during operation:• Configuring the operational
display• Reading measured values• Defining the operating language• Defining the Web server operating language• Resetting and controlling totalizers"Maintenance" roleCommissioning:• Configuration of themeasurement• Configuration of the inputs andoutputs• Configuration of thecommunication interface

Wizards for fast commissioning:• Set the system units• Display I/O/configuration• Configure the inputs• Configure the outputs• Configuring the operational display• Define the output conditioning• Set the low flow cut off• Configure empty pipe detection• Configuring the operational display (e.g. display format, display contrast)• Resetting and controlling totalizers

Advanced setup• For more customized configuration of the measurement (adaptation to
special measuring conditions)• Configuration of totalizers• Configuration of electrode cleaning (optional)• Configure the WLAN settings• Administration (define access code, reset measuring device)
Diagnostics

Endress+Hauser"Maintenance" role
Fault elimination:• Diagnostics and elimination ofprocess and device errors• Measured value simulation

Contains all parameters for error detection and analyzing process and device
errors:• Diagnostic list
Contains up to 5 currently pending diagnostic messages.
• Event logbook
Contains event messages that have occurred.
• Device information
Contains information for identifying the device.
• Measured values
Contains all current measured values.
• Analog inputs
Is used to display the analog input.
• Data logging submenu with "Extended HistoROM" order option
Storage and visualization of measured values• Heartbeat
The functionality of the device is checked on demand and the verification
results are documented.
• Simulation
Is used to simulate measured values or output values.

51

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Menu/parameter
Expertfunction-oriented

User role and tasks

Content/meaning

Tasks that require detailed
knowledge of the function of thedevice:• Commissioning measurements
under difficult conditions• Optimal adaptation of themeasurement to difficult
conditions• Detailed configuration of thecommunication interface• Error diagnostics in difficult cases

Contains all the parameters of the device and makes it possible to accessthese parameters directly using an access code. The structure of this menu isbased on the function blocks of the device:• SystemContains all higher-order device parameters which do not concern themeasurement or the communication interface.
• Sensor
Configuration of the measurement.
• Input
Configuring the status input.
• Output
Configuring of the analog current outputs as well as the pulse/frequency
and switch output.
• Communication
Configuration of the digital communication interface and the Web server.
• Submenus for function blocks (e.g. "Analog Inputs")
Configuration of function blocks.
• Application
Configure the functions that go beyond the actual measurement (e.g.
totalizer).
• Diagnostics
Error detection and analysis of process and device errors and for device
simulation and Heartbeat Technology.

8.3

Access to the operating menu via the local display

8.3.1

Operational display
1
2

XXXXXXXXX

4F

31120.50l/h

5A0029346

1
2
3
4
5

Operational display
Device tag→  91
Status area
Display area for measured values (4-line)
Operating elements→  58

Status area
The following symbols appear in the status area of the operational display at the top right:• Status signals→  145– F: Failure– C: Function check– S: Out of specification– M: Maintenance required• Diagnostic behavior→  146– : Alarm– : Warning• : Locking (the device is locked via the hardware )• : Communication (communication via remote operation is active)
52

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Operation options

Display area
In the display area, each measured value is prefaced by certain symbol types for further
description:
Measured variable

Measurement channel
numberDiagnostic behavior

↓

↓

↓

ExampleAppears only if a diagnostics
event is present for thismeasured variable.

Measured values
SymbolMeaning
Volume flow
Conductivity
Mass flow
Totalizer
The measurement channel number indicates which of the three totalizers is displayed.
Status input

Measurement channel numbers
SymbolMeaning
Measurement channel 1 to 4

The measurement channel number is displayed only if more than one channel is present for the same measured
variable type (e.g. Totalizer 1 to 3).

Diagnostic behavior
The diagnostic behavior pertains to a diagnostic event that is relevant to the displayed measured variable.
For information on the symbols →  146

The number and display format of the measured values can be configured via theFormat display parameter (→  109).

Endress+Hauser

53

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

8.3.2

2

Navigation view
In the submenu

In the wizard

1

10091-1/../Operation
Access stat.disp

3/../Curr. output 1
S
Assign curr.
Volume flow

2

Operator
Locking status
Display

44

5

5A0013993-EN

1
2
3
4
5

3

A0016327-EN

Navigation view
Navigation path to current position
Status area
Display area for navigation
Operating elements →  58

Navigation path
The navigation path - displayed at the top left in the navigation view - consists of thefollowing elements:• In the submenu:
Display symbol for menu
• In the wizard:
Display symbol for wizard↓
ExamplesOmission symbol for
operating menu levels in
betweenName of current• Submenu• Wizard• Parameters

↓

↓

/ ../

Display/ ../Display

For more information about the icons in the menu, refer to the "Display area" section→  55
Status area
The following appears in the status area of the navigation view in the top right corner:• In the submenu– The direct access code for the parameter you are navigating to (e.g. 0022-1)– If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal• In the wizard
If a diagnostic event is present, the diagnostic behavior and status signal• For information on the diagnostic behavior and status signal →  145• For information on the function and entry of the direct access code →  60

54

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Operation options

Display area
Menus
SymbolMeaning
Operation
Appears:• In the menu next to the "Operation" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Operation menu
Setup
Appears:• In the menu next to the "Setup" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Setup menu
Diagnostics
Appears:• In the menu next to the "Diagnostics" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Diagnostics menu
ExpertAppears:• In the menu next to the "Expert" selection• At the left in the navigation path in the Expert menu

Submenus, wizards, parameters
SymbolMeaning
Submenu
WizardParameters within a wizard

 No display symbol exists for parameters in submenus.
Locking
SymbolMeaningParameter locked
When displayed in front of a parameter name, indicates that the parameter is locked.
• By a user-specific access code
• By the hardware write protection switch

Wizard operation
SymbolMeaning
Switches to the previous parameter.
Confirms the parameter value and switches to the next parameter.
Opens the editing view of the parameter.

Endress+Hauser

55

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

8.3.3

Editing view

Numeric editor
1

0
5
+

2

1
6
–

+0.000 Xx
2
3
8
7

4
9

3

4
A0034250

 19
1
2
3
4

For entering values in parameters (e.g. limit values)

Entry display area
Input screen
Confirm, delete or reject entry
Operating elements

Text editor
1

2

XxxxxxxA B C D E F G H I J K
L M N O P Q R S T U V W
X Y Z

6
7

3
5
4

A0034114

 20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

For entering text in parameters (e.g. tag name)

Entry display area
Current input screen
Change input screen
Operating elements
Move entry position
Delete entry
Reject or confirm entry

Using the operating elements in the editing viewOperating key(s)Meaning
Minus keyMove the entry position to the left.
Plus keyMove the entry position to the right.

56

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Operation options

Operating key(s)MeaningEnter key
• Press the key briefly: confirm your selection.
• Press the key for 2 s: confirm the entry.

+

Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously)
Close the editing view without accepting the changes.

Input screens
SymbolMeaning
Upper case
Lower caseNumbers
Punctuation marks and special characters: = + – * / ² ³ ¼ ½ ¾ ( ) [ ] < > { }Punctuation marks and special characters: ' " `^. , ; : ? ! % µ ° € $ £ ¥ § @ # / \ I ~ & _Umlauts and accents

Controlling data entries
SymbolMeaningMove entry position
Reject entry
Confirm entry
Delete character immediately to the left of the entry position
Delete character immediately to the right of the entry position
Clear all the characters entered

Endress+Hauser

57

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

8.3.4

Operating elements

Operating key(s)Meaning
Minus key
In a menu, submenu
Moves the selection bar upwards in a picklist.
With a Wizard
Confirms the parameter value and goes to the previous parameter.
With a text and numeric editor
Move the entry position to the left.
Plus key
In a menu, submenu
Moves the selection bar downwards in a picklist.
With a Wizard
Confirms the parameter value and goes to the next parameter.
With a text and numeric editor
Move the entry position to the right.
Enter key
For operational display
Pressing the key briefly opens the operating menu.
In a menu, submenu• Pressing the key briefly:– Opens the selected menu, submenu or parameter.
– Starts the wizard.
– If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter.
• Pressing the key for 2 s for parameter:
If present, opens the help text for the function of the parameter.
With a Wizard
Opens the editing view of the parameter.
With a text and numeric editor• Press the key briefly: confirm your selection.
• Press the key for 2 s: confirm the entry.
Escape key combination (press keys simultaneously)
In a menu, submenu• Pressing the key briefly:– Exits the current menu level and takes you to the next higher level.
– If help text is open, closes the help text of the parameter.
• Pressing the key for 2 s returns you to the operational display ("home position").

+With a Wizard
Exits the wizard and takes you to the next higher level.
With a text and numeric editor
Close the editing view without accepting the changes.
Minus/Enter key combination (press the keys simultaneously)• If the keypad lock is active:
Press the key for 3 s: deactivate the keypad lock.
• If the keypad lock is not active:
Press the key for 3 s: the context menu opens along with the option for activating the
keypad lock.

+

8.3.5

Opening the context menu

Using the context menu, the user can call up the following menus quickly and directly fromthe operational display:• Setup• Data backup• Simulation

58

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Operation options

Calling up and closing the context menu
The user is in the operational display.
1.

Press the  and  keys for longer than 3 seconds.
 The context menu opens.
XXXXXXXXXX
Setup
Conf.backup
Simulation
Keylock on

l/hA0034608-EN

2.

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The context menu is closed and the operational display appears.

Calling up the menu via the context menu

Endress+Hauser

1.

Open the context menu.

2.

Press  to navigate to the desired menu.

3.

Press  to confirm the selection.
 The selected menu opens.

59

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

8.3.6

Navigating and selecting from list

Different operating elements are used to navigate through the operating menu. The
navigation path is displayed on the left in the header. Icons are displayed in front of theindividual menus. These icons are also shown in the header during navigation.
For an explanation of the navigation view with symbols and operating elements→  54
Example: Setting the number of displayed measured values to "2 values"
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
1.

0104-1Main menu
Language

EnglishDisplay/operat.
Setup

2.

Main menu
Language
Display/operat.
Setup/ ../Display/operat.

0091-1

Access stat.disp

3.

Operator
Locking status
Display/ ../Display/operat.
Locking status
Display4.

/ ../Display

0098-1

Format display
1 value, max.
Contrast display
Display intervall

5.

/ ../Format display
1 value, max.
Bargr. + 1 value
2 values
Val. large+2val.

6.

0098-10098-1/ ../Format display
1 value, max.
Bargr. + 1 value
2 values
Val. large+2val.

7.

XXXXXXXXX

8.

2s

10.50
mA
2800
Hz
A0029562-EN

8.3.7

Calling the parameter directly

A parameter number is assigned to every parameter to be able to access a parameter
directly via the onsite display. Entering this access code in the Direct access parameter
calls up the desired parameter directly.
Navigation path
Expert → Direct access
60

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Operation options

The direct access code consists of a 5-digit number (at maximum) and the channel
number, which identifies the channel of a process variable: e.g. 00914-2. In the navigation
view, this appears on the right-hand side in the header of the selected parameter.
00914-2

1

A0029414

1

Direct access code

Note the following when entering the direct access code:• The leading zeros in the direct access code do not have to be entered.
Example: Enter "914" instead of "00914"• If no channel number is entered, channel 1 is accessed automatically.
Example: Enter 00914 → Assign process variable parameter• If a different channel is accessed: Enter the direct access code with the corresponding
channel number.
Example: Enter 00914-2 → Assign process variable parameter
For the direct access codes of the individual parameters, see the "Description of Device
Parameters" document for the device

8.3.8

Calling up help text

Help text is available for some parameters and can be called up from the navigation view.
The help text provides a brief explanation of the parameter function and thereby supports
swift and safe commissioning.
Calling up and closing the help text
The user is in the navigation view and the selection bar is on a parameter.
1.

Press  for 2 s.
 The help text for the selected parameter opens.
Ent. access code
Enter access code to disable
write protec.

A0014002-EN

 21

2.

Example: Help text for parameter "Enter access code"

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The help text is closed.

8.3.9

Changing the parameters

Parameters can be changed via the numeric editor or text editor.
• Numeric editor: Change values in a parameter, e.g. specifications for limit values.
• Text editor: Enter text in a parameter, e.g. tag name.
A message is displayed if the value entered is outside the permitted value range.

Endress+Hauser

61

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Ent. access code
Invalid or out of range input
value
Min:0
Max:9999
A0014049-EN

For a description of the editing view - consisting of the text editor and numeric editor- with symbols →  56, for a description of the operating elements →  58

8.3.10User roles and related access authorization

The two user roles "Operator" and "Maintenance" have different write access to theparameters if the customer defines a user-specific access code. This protects the device
configuration via the local display from unauthorized access →  128.
Defining access authorization for user roles
An access code is not yet defined when the device is delivered from the factory. Accessauthorization (read and write access) to the device is not restricted and corresponds to the"Maintenance" user role.

‣ Define the access code.
 The "Operator" user role is redefined in addition to the "Maintenance" user role.
Access authorization differs for the two user roles.
Access authorization to parameters: "Maintenance" user role
Access code status

Read access

Write accessAn access code has not yet been defined(factory setting).



After an access code has been defined.



 1)

1)

The user only has write access after entering the access code.

Access authorization to parameters: "Operator" user role
Access code status
After an access code has been defined.
1)

Read access

Write access



–– 1)

Despite the defined access code, certain parameters can always be modified and thus are excepted fromthe write protection, as they do not affect the measurement. Refer to the "Write protection via access code"
sectionThe user role with which the user is currently logged on is indicated by the Accessstatus parameter. Navigation path: Operation → Access status

8.3.11Disabling write protection via access code

If the -symbol appears on the local display in front of a parameter, the parameter iswrite-protected by a user-specific access code and its value cannot be changed at the
moment using local operation →  128.
Parameter write protection via local operation can be disabled by entering the user-specificaccess code in the Enter access code parameter via the respective access option.
1.

62

After you press , the input prompt for the access code appears.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

2.

Operation options

Enter the access code.
 The -symbol in front of the parameters disappears; all previously writeprotected parameters are now re-enabled.

8.3.12

Enabling and disabling the keypad lockThe keypad lock makes it possible to block access to the entire operating menu via local
operation. As a result, it is no longer possible to navigate through the operating menu orchange the values of individual parameters. Users can only read the measured values on
the operational display.
The keypad lock is switched on and off via the context menu.
Switching on the keypad lockThe keypad lock is switched on automatically:• If the device has not been operated via the display for > 1 minute.
• Each time the device is restarted.
To activate the keylock manually:1.

The device is in the measured value display.
Press the  and  keys for 3 seconds.
 A context menu appears.

2.

In the context menu select the Keylock on option.
 The keypad lock is switched on.
If the user attempts to access the operating menu while the keypad lock is active, theKeylock on message appears.

Switching off the keypad lock

‣ The keypad lock is switched on.
Press the  and  keys for 3 seconds.
 The keypad lock is switched off.

8.4

Access to the operating menu via the Web browser

8.4.1

Function range

Thanks to the integrated Web server, the device can be operated and configured via a Web
browser and via a service interface (CDI-RJ45) or via a WLAN interface. The structure of
the operating menu is the same as for the local display. In addition to the measured values,
status information on the device is also displayed and allows the user to monitor the statusof the device. Furthermore the device data can be managed and the network parameters
can be configured.
A device that has a WLAN interface (can be ordered as an option) is required for the
WLAN connection: order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch
control + WLAN". The device acts as an Access Point and enables communication bycomputer or a mobile handheld terminal.
For additional information on the Web server, refer to the Special Documentation forthe device

Endress+Hauser

63

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

8.4.2

Prerequisites

Computer hardware
Hardware

Interface
CDI-RJ45

WLAN

Interface

The computer must have an RJ45
interface.

The operating unit must have a
WLAN interface.

Connection

Standard Ethernet cable with RJ45
connector.

Connection via Wireless LAN.

ScreenRecommended size: ≥12" (depends on the screen resolution)

Computer software
Software

Interface
CDI-RJ45

Recommended operating
systems

WLAN• Microsoft Windows 7 or higher.
• Mobile operating systems:– iOS– Android Microsoft Windows XP is supported.
Web browsers supported• Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 or higher• Microsoft Edge
• Mozilla Firefox• Google Chrome• SafariComputer settings
Settings

Interface
CDI-RJ45

WLAN

User rights

Appropriate user rights (e.g. administrator rights) for TCP/IP and proxy server
settings are necessary (for adjusting the IP address, subnet mask etc.).

Proxy server settings of the
Web browser

The Web browser setting Use a Proxy Server for Your LAN must be
deselected .

JavaScript

JavaScript must be enabled.
JavaScript cannot be enabled: Ifenter
http://192.168.1.212/basic.html in the address line of the Webbrowser. A fully functional but simplified version of the operating menu
structure starts in the Web browser.
installing a new firmware version: To enable correct data display, Whenclear the temporary memory (cache) of the Web browser under Internet
options.

Network connections

Only the active network connections to the measuring device should be used.
Switch off all other network
connections such as WLAN.

Switch off all other network
connections.

In the event of connection problems: →  142

64

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Operation options

Measuring device: Via CDI-RJ45 service interface
Device

CDI-RJ45 service interface

Measuring device

The measuring device has an RJ45 interface.

Web server

Web server must be enabled; factory setting: ON

 For information on enabling the Web server →  69
Measuring device: via WLAN interface
DeviceWLAN interface

Measuring device

The measuring device has a WLAN antenna:• Transmitter with integrated WLAN antenna• Transmitter with external WLAN antenna

Web server

Web server and WLAN must be enabled; factory setting: ON

 For information on enabling the Web server →  69
8.4.3

Establishing a connection

Via service interface (CDI-RJ45)
Preparing the measuring device
1.

Depending on the housing version:
Release the securing clamp or securing screw of the housing cover.

2.

Depending on the housing version:
Unscrew or open the housing cover.

3.

The location of the connection socket depends on the measuring device and thecommunication protocol:
Connect the computer to the RJ45 connector via the standard Ethernet connecting
cable .

Configuring the Internet protocol of the computer
The following information refers to the default Ethernet settings of the device.
IP address of the device: 192.168.1.212 (factory setting)Endress+Hauser

1.

Switch on the measuring device.

2.

Connect to the computer using a cable →  70.

3.

If a 2nd network card is not used, close all the applications on the notebook.
 Applications requiring Internet or a network, such as e-mail, SAP applications,Internet or Windows Explorer.

4.

Close any open Internet browsers.

5.

Configure the properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) as defined in the table:

IP address

192.168.1.XXX; for XXX all numerical sequences except: 0, 212 and 255 → e.g.
192.168.1.213

Subnet mask

255.255.255.0

Default gateway

192.168.1.212 or leave cells empty

65

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Via WLAN interface
Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal
NOTICE
If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost.
‣ Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device.
NOTICEIn principle, avoid simultaneous access to the measuring device via the service
interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface from the same mobile terminal. This
could cause a network conflict.
‣ Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 service interface or WLAN interface).
‣ If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g.
192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface).
Preparing the mobile terminal‣ Enable WLAN reception on the mobile terminal.
Establishing a connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device
1.

In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal:
Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_Promag_300_A802000).

2.

If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method.

3.

Enter the password: serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g.
L100A802000).
 LED on display module flashes: it is now possible to operate the measuring device
with the Web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare.
The serial number can be found on the nameplate.
To ensure the safe and swift assignment of the WLAN network to the measuring
point, it is advisable to change the SSID name. It should be possible to clearly assign
the new SSID name to the measuring point (e.g. tag name) because it is displayed as
the WLAN network.

Disconnecting‣ After configuring the device:
Terminate the WLAN connection between the operating unit and measuring device.
Starting the Web browser
1.

66

Start the Web browser on the computer.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

2.

Operation options

Enter the IP address of the Web server in the address line of the Web browser:
192.168.1.212
 The login page appears.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7
8
9
10
A0029417

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Picture of device
Device name
Device tag
Status signal
Current measured values
Operating language
User role
Access code
Login
Reset access code (→  125)

If a login page does not appear, or if the page is incomplete →  142

8.4.4

Logging on

1.

Select the preferred operating language for the Web browser.

2.

Enter the user-specific access code.

3.

Press OK to confirm your entry.

Access code

0000 (factory setting); can be changed by customer

If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the Web browser automatically returns to
the login page.

Endress+Hauser

67

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

8.4.5

User interface

1
2

3
A0029418

1
2
3Function row
Local display language
Navigation area

Header
The following information appears in the header:• Device name• Device tag• Device status with status signal →  148• Current measured values
Function row
Functions

Meaning

Measured values

Displays the measured values of the measuring device

Menu

68

• Access to the operating menu from the measuring device• The structure of the operating menu is the same as for the local display
detailed information on the structure of the operating menu, see the Operating
 For
Instructions for the measuring device

Device status

Displays the diagnostic messages currently pending, listed in order of priority

Data
management

Data exchange between PC and measuring device:• Device configuration:– Load settings from the device(XML format, save configuration)– Save settings to the device(XML format, restore configuration)• Logbook - Export Event logbook (.csv file)• Documents - Export documents:– Export backup data record(.csv file, create documentation of the measuring point configuration)– Verification report(PDF file, only available with the "Heartbeat Verification" application package)• File for system integration - If using fieldbuses, upload device drivers for system
integration from the measuring device:
PROFIBUS DP: GSD file• Firmware update - Flashing a firmware version

Network
configuration

Configuration and checking of all the parameters required for establishing the connection to
the measuring device:• Network settings (e.g. IP address, MAC address)• Device information (e.g. serial number, firmware version)

Logout

End the operation and call up the login page

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Operation options

Navigation area
If a function is selected in the function bar, the submenus of the function open in thenavigation area. The user can now navigate through the menu structure.
Working area
Depending on the selected function and the related submenus, various actions can be
performed in this area:• Configuring parameters• Reading measured values• Calling up help text
• Starting an upload/download

8.4.6

Disabling the Web server

The Web server of the measuring device can be switched on and off as required using the
Web server functionality parameter.
Navigation"Expert" menu → Communication → Web server
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Web server functionality

Description
Switch the Web server on and off.

Selection• Off• HTML Off• On

Factory setting
On

Function scope of the "Web server functionality" parameter
OptionDescription

Off• The web server is completely disabled.
• Port 80 is locked.

On• The complete functionality of the web server is available.
• JavaScript is used.
• The password is transferred in an encrypted state.
• Any change to the password is also transferred in an encrypted state.

Enabling the Web server
If the Web server is disabled it can only be re-enabled with the Web server functionality
parameter via the following operating options:• Via local display• Via Bedientool "FieldCare"• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool

8.4.7

Logging out

Before logging out, perform a data backup via the Data management function(upload configuration from device) if necessary.

Endress+Hauser

1.

Select the Logout entry in the function row.
 The home page with the Login box appears.

2.

Close the Web browser.

3.

If no longer needed:
Reset modified properties of the Internet protocol (TCP/IP) →  65.
69

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

8.5

Access to the operating menu via the operating tool

The structure of the operating menu in the operating tools is the same as for operation via
the local display.

8.5.1

Connecting the operating tool

Via PROFIBUS DP network
This communication interface is available in device versions with PROFIBUS DP.
1

2

3

4

4

4
A0020903

 22
1
2
3
4

Options for remote operation via PROFIBUS DP network

Automation system
Computer with PROFIBUS network card
PROFIBUS DP network
Measuring device

Service interface
Via service interface (CDI-RJ45)
A point-to-point connection can be established to configure the device onsite. With the
housing open, the connection is established directly via the service interface (CDI-RJ45) of
the device.
An adapter for RJ45 and the M12 connector is optionally available:
Order code for "Accessories", option NB: "Adapter RJ45 M12 (service interface)"
The adapter connects the service interface (CDI-RJ45) to an M12 connector mounted
in the cable entry. Therefore the connection to the service interface can be established
via an M12 connector without opening the device.

70

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Operation options

1
3

2

A0027563

 23
1
2
3

Connection via service interface (CDI-RJ45)

Computer with Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) for accessing the integrated
device Web server or with "FieldCare", "DeviceCare" operating tool with COM DTM "CDI Communication TCP/IP"
Standard Ethernet connecting cable with RJ45 connector
Service interface (CDI-RJ45) of the measuring device with access to the integrated Web server

Via WLAN interface
The optional WLAN interface is available on the following device version:
Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated, graphic display; touch
control + WLAN"
3

1

4

5

2

6

3

4

7
A0034570

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Transmitter with integrated WLAN antenna
Transmitter with external WLAN antenna
LED lit constantly: WLAN reception is enabled on measuring device
LED flashing: WLAN connection established between operating unit and measuring device
Computer with WLAN interface and Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge) foraccessing the integrated device Web server or with operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare)
Mobile handheld terminal with WLAN interface and Web browser (e.g. Microsoft Internet Explorer, Microsoft
Edge) for accessing the integrated device Web server or operating tool (e.g. FieldCare, DeviceCare)
Smart phone or tablet (e.g. Field Xpert SMT70)

Encryption

WPA2-PSK AES-128 (in accordance with IEEE 802.11i)

Configurable WLAN channels

1 to 11Degree of protection

IP67

Available antennas• Internal antenna• External antenna (optional)
In the event of poor transmission/reception conditions at the place ofinstallation.

 Only one antenna active in each case!
Endress+Hauser

71

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Max. range

50 m (164 ft)

Materials:
External WLAN antenna• Antenna: ASA plastic (acrylic ester-styrene-acrylonitrile) and nickelplated brass• Adapter: Stainless steel and nickel-plated brass• Cable: Polyethylene• Connector: Nickel-plated brass• Angle bracket: Stainless steel

Configuring the Internet protocol of the mobile terminal
NOTICE
If the WLAN connection is lost during the configuration, settings made may be lost.
‣ Make sure that the WLAN connection is not disconnected while configuring the device.
NOTICEIn principle, avoid simultaneous access to the measuring device via the service
interface (CDI-RJ45) and the WLAN interface from the same mobile terminal. This
could cause a network conflict.
‣ Only activate one service interface (CDI-RJ45 service interface or WLAN interface).
‣ If simultaneous communication is necessary: configure different IP address ranges, e.g.
192.168.0.1 (WLAN interface) and 192.168.1.212 (CDI-RJ45 service interface).
Preparing the mobile terminal‣ Enable WLAN reception on the mobile terminal.
Establishing a connection from the mobile terminal to the measuring device
1.

In the WLAN settings of the mobile terminal:
Select the measuring device using the SSID (e.g. EH_Promag_300_A802000).

2.

If necessary, select the WPA2 encryption method.

3.

Enter the password: serial number of the measuring device ex-works (e.g.
L100A802000).
 LED on display module flashes: it is now possible to operate the measuring device
with the Web browser, FieldCare or DeviceCare.
The serial number can be found on the nameplate.
To ensure the safe and swift assignment of the WLAN network to the measuring
point, it is advisable to change the SSID name. It should be possible to clearly assign
the new SSID name to the measuring point (e.g. tag name) because it is displayed as
the WLAN network.

Disconnecting‣ After configuring the device:
Terminate the WLAN connection between the operating unit and measuring device.

8.5.2

FieldCare

Function scope
FDT-based plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser. It can configure all smart
field devices in a system and helps you manage them. By using the status information, it isalso a simple but effective way of checking their status and condition.
Access is via:
• CDI-RJ45 service interface →  70
• WLAN interface→  71

72

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Operation options

Typical functions:• Configuring parameters of transmitters• Loading and saving device data (upload/download)• Documentation of the measuring point• Visualization of the measured value memory (line recorder) and event logbook
For additional information about FieldCare, see Operating Instructions BA00027S
and BA00059S
Source for device description files
See information →  75
Establishing a connection
1.

Start FieldCare and launch the project.

2.

In the network: Add a device.
 The Add device window opens.

3.

Select the CDI Communication TCP/IP option from the list and press OK to confirm.

4.

Right-click CDI Communication TCP/IP and select the Add device option in thecontext menu that opens.

5.

Select the desired device from the list and press OK to confirm.
 The CDI Communication TCP/IP (Configuration) window opens.

6.

Enter the device address in the IP address field: 192.168.1.212 and press Enter toconfirm.

7.

Establish the online connection to the device.
For additional information, see Operating Instructions BA00027S and BA00059S

Endress+Hauser

73

Operation options

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

User interface
2

4

3

6

5

7

Xxxxxx/…/…/

1

Device name:

Xxxxxxx

Mass flow:

12.34

kg/h

Device tag:

Xxxxxxx

Volume flow:

12.34

m³/h

Status:Good

XxxxxxAccess status tooling+
Operation
P

–

Setup
Device tag–
System unitsP
Mass flow unit
P
Volume flow unit+
Select medium
P

8

+

…

+

…

+

Maintenance

Mass flow unit:

kg/hVolume flow unit:m³/h

Xxxxxx
kg/h
m³/h

9

Advanced setup+

Diagnostics+

Expert10

11A0021051-EN

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

HeaderPicture of device
Device nameTag name
Status area with status signal→  148
Display area for current measured values
Edit toolbar with additional functions such as save/restore, event list and create documentation
Navigation area with operating menu structure
Working area
Range of action
Status area

8.5.3

DeviceCare

Function scope
Tool to connect and configure Endress+Hauser field devices.
The fastest way to configure Endress+Hauser field devices is with the dedicated"DeviceCare" tool. Together with the device type managers (DTMs) it presents a convenient,comprehensive solution.
For details, see Innovation Brochure IN01047S
Source for device description files
See information →  75

74

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

System integration

9

System integration

9.1

Overview of device description files

9.1.1

Current version data for the device

Firmware version

01.00.zz• On the title page of the Operating instructions• On the transmitter nameplate• Firmware version
Diagnostics → Device information → Firmware
versionRelease date of firmware version

06.2018---

Manufacturer ID

0x11

Manufacturer ID
Diagnostics → Device information → Manufacturer ID

Device type ID

0x1570Device type
Diagnostics → Device information → Device type

Profile version

3.02

---

For an overview of the different firmware versions for the device →  181

9.1.2

Operating tools

The suitable device description file for the individual operating tools is listed in the tablebelow, along with information on where the file can be acquired.
Operating tool via
PROFIBUS protocol

Sources for obtaining device descriptions

FieldCare• www.endress.com → Download Area
• CD–ROM (contact Endress+Hauser)• DVD (contact Endress+Hauser)

DeviceCare• www.endress.com → Download Area
• CD–ROM (contact Endress+Hauser)• DVD (contact Endress+Hauser)

9.2

Device master file (GSD)

In order to integrate field devices into a bus system, the PROFIBUS system needs a
description of the device parameters, such as output data, input data, data format, data
volume and supported transmission rate.
These data are available in the device master file (GSD) which is provided to the PROFIBUS
Master when the communication system is commissioned. In addition device bit maps,
which appear as icons in the network structure, can also be integrated.
With the Profile 3.02 device master file (GSD) it is possible to exchange field devices madeby different manufacturers without having to reconfigure.
Generally speaking, it is possible to use two different GSDs with Profile 3.02 and higher:
the manufacturer-specific GSD and the Profile GSD.
• Before configuring, the user must decide which GSD should be used to operate thesystem.
• The setting can be changed via a Class 2 master.

Endress+Hauser

75

System integration

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

9.2.1

Manufacturer-specific GSD

This GSD guarantees the unrestricted functionality of the measuring device. Device-specificprocess parameters and functions are therefore available.
Manufacturer-specific GSD

ID numberFile name

PROFIBUS DP

0x1570EH3x1570.gsd

The fact that the manufacturer-specific GSD should be used is specified in the Ident
number selector parameter by selecting the Manufacturer option.
Where to acquire the manufacturer-specific GSD:
www.endress.com → Downloads area

9.2.2

Profile GSD

Differs in terms of the number of Analog Input blocks (AI) and the measured values. If asystem is configured with a Profile GSD, it is possible to exchange devices made bydifferent manufacturers. However, it is essential to ensure that the order of the cyclic
process values is correct.
ID number

Supported blocks

Supported channels

0x9740• 1 Analog Input• 1 Totalizer• Channel Analog Input: volume flow
• Channel totalizer: volume flow

0x9741• 2 Analog Input• 1 Totalizer• Channel Analog Input 1: volume flow
• Channel Analog Input 2: mass flow
• Channel totalizer: volume flow

0x9742• 3 Analog Input• 1 Totalizer• Channel Analog Input 1: volume flow
• Channel Analog Input 2: mass flow
• Channel Analog Input 3: corrected volume
flow• Channel totalizer: volume flow

The Profile GSD that is to be used is specified in the Ident number selector parameter byselecting the Profile 0x9740 option, Profile 0x9741 option or Profile 0x9742 option.

9.3

Compatibility with earlier model

If the device is replaced, the Promag 300 measuring device supports the compatibility of
the cyclic data with previous models. It is not necessary to adjust the engineeringparameters of the PROFIBUS network with the Promag 300 GSD file.
Earlier models:• Promag 50 PROFIBUS DP– ID No.: 1546 (hex)– Extended GSD file: EH3x1546.gsd– Standard GSD file: EH3_1546.gsd• Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP– ID No.: 1526 (hex)– Extended GSD file: EH3x1526.gsd– Standard GSD file: EH3_1526.gsd

9.3.1

Automatic identification (factory setting)

The Promag 300 PROFIBUS DP automatically recognizes the measuring device configuredin the automation system (Promag 50 PROFIBUS DP or Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP) and76

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

System integration

makes the same input and output data and measured value status information available
for cyclic data exchange.
Automatic identification is set in the Ident number selector parameter using theAutomatic mode option (factory setting).

9.3.2

Manual setting

The manual setting is made in the Ident number selector parameter via the Promag 50(0x1546) option or Promag 53 (0x1526) option.
Afterwards the Promag 300 PROFIBUS DP makes the same input and output data andmeasured value status information →  150 available for cyclic data exchange.
• If the Promag 300 PROFIBUS DP is acyclically configured via an operating program(Class 2 master), access is directly via the block structure or the parameters of themeasuring device.
• If parameters have been changed in the device to be replaced (Promag 50 PROFIBUS DP
oder Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP) (parameter setting no longer corresponds to the original
factory setting), these parameters must be changed accordingly in the new Promag 300
PROFIBUS DP being used via an operating program (Class 2 master).
ExampleThe assignment setting for low flow cut off has been changed from mass flow (factory
setting) to corrected volume flow in a Promag 50 PROFIBUS DP currently in operation.
This device is now replaced by a Promag 300 PROFIBUS DP.
After replacing the device, the assignment for the low flow cut off must also be changed
manually in the Promag 300 PROFIBUS DP, i.e. to corrected volume flow, to ensure themeasuring device behaves identically.

9.3.3

Replacing the measuring devices without changing the GSD
file or restarting the controller

In the procedure described below, the device can be replaced without interrupting ongoing
operation or restarting the controller. However with this procedure the measuring device is
not fully integrated!
1.

Replace the measuring device Promag 50 PROFIBUS DP or Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP
by the Promag 300 PROFIBUS DP.

2.

Set the device address: The same device address that was set for Promag 50 orPromag 53 PROFIBUS DP and is configured in the automation system must be used.

3.

Connect the measuring device Promag 300 PROFIBUS DP.

If the factory setting had been changed on the replaced device (Promag 50 PROFIBUS DP
or Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP), the following settings may need to be changed:

Endress+Hauser

1.

Configuration of the application-specific parameters.

2.

Choice of process variables to be transmitted via theChannel parameter in the
Analog Input or Totalizer function block.

3.

Setting of the units for the process variables.

77System integration

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

9.4

Using the GSD modules of the previous model

In the compatibility mode, all the modules already configured in the automation system
are generally supported during cyclic data transmission. However, Promag 300 does not
perform further processing for the following modules, i.e. the function is not executed:• DISPLAY_VALUE• BATCHING_QUANTITY• BATCHING_FIX_COMP_QUANTITY
If the device is replaced, the measuring device Promag 300 supports the compatibility of
the cyclic data with previous models. It is not necessary to adjust the engineeringparameters of the PROFIBUS network with the Promag 300 GSD file.

9.4.1

Using the CONTROL_BLOCK module in the previous model

If the CONTROL_BLOCK module is used in the previous model, the control variables areprocessed further if relevant functionalities can be assigned for the Promag 300.
The functions are supported as follows depending on the previous model:
Previous model: Promag 50 PROFIBUS DP
Control variable

Function

Support0→2

Positive zero return: ON

Yes

0→3

Positive zero return: OFF

Yes

0→8

Measuring mode: UNIDIRECTIONAL

No

0→9

Measuring mode: BIDIRECTIONAL

Cause:The Profile Transducer Block Flow is nolonger supported.
To continue to use the functionality:
Use the Totalizer operation modeparameter in the Totalizer function block.

0 → 24

UNIT TO BUS

No
Cause:
Functionality is no longer required as theunit is adopted automatically.

Previous model: Promag 53 PROFIBUS DP
Control variable

Function

Support0→2

Positive zero return: ON

Yes

0→3

Positive zero return: OFF

Yes

0→5

Electrode cleaning circuit (ECC): OFF

Yes

0→6

Electrode cleaning circuit (ECC): ON

Yes

0→8

Measuring mode: UNIDIRECTIONAL

No

0→9

Measuring mode: BIDIRECTIONAL

Cause:The Profile Transducer Block Flow is nolonger supported.
To continue to use the functionality:
Use the Totalizer operation modeparameter in the Totalizer function block.

0 → 24

UNIT TO BUS

No
Cause:
Functionality is no longer required as theunit is adopted automatically.

78

0 → 50

Relay output 1: ON

0 → 51

Relay output 1: OFF

Yes, terminals 24/25 (I/O 2)

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Endress+Hauser

System integration

Control variable

Function

Support0 → 55

Relay output 2: ON

Yes, terminals 22/23 (I/O 3)

0 → 56

Relay output 2: OFF

0 → 30 to 46

Additional functions: BatchingNo

79

System integration

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

9.5

Cyclic data transmission

Cyclic data transmission when using the device master file (GSD).

9.5.1

Block model

The block model shows which input and output data the measuring device makes available
for cyclic data exchange. Cyclic data exchange takes place with a PROFIBUS master (Class1), e.g. a control system.
Measuring device
Analog Input block 1 to 4

Totalizer block 1 to 3
Flow
Block

→  81→  81

Control system
Output value AI→

Output value TOTAL→

Controller SETTOT←

Configuration MODETOT←

Analog Output block 1 to2

→  83

Input values AO←

Discrete Input block 1 to 2

→  84

Output values DI→

Discrete Output block 1 to5

→  85

Input values DO←

PROFIBUS DP

Defined order of modules
The measuring device works as a modular PROFIBUS slave. In contrast to a compact slave,a modular slave has a variable design and consists of several individual modules. The
device master file (GSD) contains a description of the individual modules (input and output
data) along with their individual properties.
The modules are permanently assigned to the slots, i.e. when configuring the modules, theorder and the arrangement of the modules must be respected.
Slot

Module1 to 4AI

5
6
7

TOTAL orSETTOT_TOTAL or
SETOT_MODETOT_TOTAL

Function block
Analog Input block 1 to 4
Totalizer block 1
Totalizer block 2
Totalizer block 3

8 to 9AO

Analog Output block 1 to 2

10 to 11DI

Discrete Input block 1 to 2

12 to 16

DO

Discrete Output block 1 to 5

To optimize the data throughput rate of the PROFIBUS network, it is advisable to only
configure modules that are processed in the PROFIBUS master system. If this results ingaps between the configured modules, these gaps must be assigned to the
EMPTY_MODULE.

9.5.2

Description of the modules

The data structure is described from the perspective of the PROFIBUS master:• Input data: Are sent from the measuring device to the PROFIBUS master.
• Output data: Are sent from the PROFIBUS master to the measuring device.

80

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

System integration

AI module (Analog Input)
Transmit an input variable from the measuring device to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1).
The selected input variable, along with the status, is cyclically transmitted to the
PROFIBUS Master (Class 1) via the AI module. The input variable is depicted in the first
four bytes in the form of a floating point number as per the IEEE 754 standard. The fifth
byte contains standardized status information pertaining to the input variable.
Four Analog Input blocks are available (slot 1 to 4).
Selection: input variable
Input variable
Volume flow
Mass flow
Corrected volume flow
Flow velocity
Conductivity
Corrected conductivity
Temperature
Electronic temperature
Current input 1
Current input 2
Current input 3

Factory setting
Function block

Factory setting

AI 1

Volume flow

AI 2

Mass flow

AI 3

Corrected volume flow

AI 4

Flow velocity

Data structure
Input data of Analog Input
Byte 1

Byte 2Byte 3

Byte 4

Measured value: floating point number (IEEE 754)

Byte 5
StatusTOTAL module
Transmit a totalizer value from the measuring device to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1).
A selected totalizer value, along with the status, is cyclically transmitted to a PROFIBUS
Master (Class 1) via the TOTAL module. The totalizer value is depicted in the first four
bytes in the form of a floating point number as per the IEEE 754 standard. The fifth byte
contains standardized status information pertaining to the totalizer value.
Three Totalizer blocks are available (slot 5 to 7).

Endress+Hauser

81

System integration

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Selection: totalizer value
Input variable
Volume flow
Mass flow
Corrected volume flow

Factory setting
Function block
Totalizer 1, 2 and 3

Factory setting: TOTAL
Volume flow

Data structure
Input data of TOTAL
Byte 1

Byte 2Byte 3

Byte 4

Measured value: floating point number (IEEE 754)

Byte 5
StatusSETTOT_TOTAL module
The module combination consists of the SETTOT and TOTAL functions:• SETTOT: Control the totalizers via the PROFIBUS master.
• TOTAL: Transmit totalizer value, along with the status, to the PROFIBUS master.
Three Totalizer blocks are available (slot 5 to 7).
Selection: control totalizer
Value SETTOT

Control totalizer

0

Totalize

1

Resetting2

Adopt totalizer initial setting

Factory setting
Function block

Factory setting: Value SETTOT (meaning)

Totalizer 1, 2 and 3

0 (totalizing)

Data structure
Output data of SETTOT
Byte 1
Control variable 1

Input data of TOTAL
Byte 1

Byte 2Byte 3

Byte 4

Measured value: floating point number (IEEE 754)

82

Byte 5
StatusEndress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

System integration

SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL module
The module combination consists of the SETTOT, MODETOT and TOTAL functions:• SETTOT: Control the totalizers via the PROFIBUS master.
• MODETOT: Configure the totalizers via the PROFIBUS master.
• TOTAL: Transmit totalizer value, along with the status, to the PROFIBUS master.
Three Totalizer blocks are available (slot 5 to 7).
Selection: totalizer configuration
MODETOT value

Totalizer configuration

0

Balancing

1

Balance the positive flow

2

Balance the negative flow

3

Stop totalizing

Factory setting
Function block
Totalizer 1, 2 and 3

Factory setting: Value MODETOT (meaning)
0 (balancing)

Data structure
Output data of SETTOT and MODETOT
Byte 1

Byte 2Control variable 1: SETTOT

Control variable 2: MODETOT

Input data of TOTAL
Byte 1

Byte 2Byte 3

Byte 4

Measured value: floating point number (IEEE 754)

Byte 5
Status

AO module (Analog Output)
Transmit a compensation value from the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) to the measuring
device.
A compensation value, along with the status, is cyclically transmitted from the PROFIBUS
Master (Class 1) to the measuring device via the AO module. The compensation value isdepicted in the first four bytes in the form of a floating point number as per the IEEE 754
standard. The fifth byte contains standardized status information pertaining to thecompensation value.
Two Analog Output blocks are available (slot 8 to 9).

Endress+Hauser

83System integration

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Assigned compensation values
A compensation value is permanently assigned to the individual Analog Output blocks.

1)

Function block

Compensation value

AO 1

External temperature 1)

AO 2

External density

The compensation values must be transmitted to the device in the SI basic unit

The selection is made via: Expert → Sensor → External compensation
Data structure
Output data of Analog Output
Byte 1

Byte 2Byte 3

Byte 4

Measured value: floating point number (IEEE 754)

Byte 5
StatusDI module (Discrete Input)
Transmit discrete input values from the measuring device to the PROFIBUS master (Class
1). Discrete input values are used by the measuring device to transmit the state of device
functions to the PROFIBUS master (Class 1).
The DI module cyclically transmits the discrete input value, along with the status, to the
PROFIBUS Master (Class 1). The discrete input value is depicted in the first byte. The
second byte contains standardized status information pertaining to the input value.
Two Discrete Input blocks are available (slot 10 to 11).
Selection: device function
Device function

Factory setting: Status (meaning)

Empty pipe detection• 0 (device function not active)• 1 (device function active)

Low flow cut off

Status verification 1)

1)• Bit 0: Verification status - Check not done
• Bit 1: Verification status - Failed• Bit 2: Verification status - Busy
• Bit 3: Verification status - Ready• Bit 4: Verification overall result - Failed• Bit 5: Verification overall result - Passed• Bit 6: Verification overall result - Check not done
• Bit 7: Not used

Only available with the Heartbeat Verification application package

Factory setting
Function block84

Factory setting

DI 1

Empty pipe detection

DI 2

Low flow cut off

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

System integration

Data structure
Input data of Discrete Input
Byte 1

Byte 2Discrete

Status

DO module (Discrete Output)
Transmit discrete output values from the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) to the measuring
device. Discrete output values are used by the PROFIBUS master (Class 1) to enable anddisable device functions.
The DO module cyclically transmits the discrete output value, along with the status, to themeasuring device. The discrete output value is depicted in the first byte. The second byte
contains standardized status information pertaining to the output value.
Five Discrete Output blocks are available (slot 12 to 16).
Assigned device functions
A device function is permanently assigned to the individual Discrete Output blocks.
Function block

Device function

DO 1

Flow override

DO 2
DO 4 (I/O 2)
DO 5 (I/O 3)
DO 6
1)

Start verification

Values: control (meaning)

1)

Relay output or switch
output of the pulse/
frequency/switch output• 0 (disable device function)• 1 (enable device function)• 0 (non-conductive)• 1 (conductive)

Is not used.

Only available with the Heartbeat Verification application package

Data structure
Output data of Discrete Output
Byte 1

Byte 2Discrete

StatusEMPTY_MODULE moduleThis module is used to assign empty spaces arising from modules not being used in theslots .
The measuring device works as a modular PROFIBUS slave. In contrast to a compact slave,a modular PROFIBUS slave has a variable design and consists of several individual
modules. The GSD file contains a description of the individual modules along with theirindividual properties.
The modules are permanently assigned to the slots. When configuring the modules, it isabsolutely essential to observe the sequence/arrangement of the modules. Any gaps
between the configured modules must be filled with the EMPTY_MODULE.

Endress+Hauser

85

System integration

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

9.6

Address shifting configuration

9.6.1

Function description

The field device also makes acyclic communication services available in addition to cyclic
communication. This enables automation systems (PLCs), central engineering stations andasset management systems to exchange data acyclically with the field device. This mode ofcommunication is typically used to configure the field device. Here, addressing at thecommunication level is implemented by PROFIBUS for slot and index value pairs. The fielddevice makes process and configuration parameters available over a wide range of slot andindex values. Currently not all control systems are able to handle communication with sucha large address area. Therefore, the field device provides the option of mirroring
parameters to slot 0 with the "Address shifting configuration" function. All common
masters allow access to slot 0. In the PLC, slot 0 of the field device is generally on the
diagnostic address of the relevant field device.

9.6.2

Structure

With the "Address shifting configuration" function, 2 address areas are defined in slot 0,
the configuration area (index 190 to 221) and the assigned data area (index 230 to 245).
The configuration area defines which parameters should be managed.
The configuration area contains the indexes 190 to 221 with which up to 16 parameters
can be managed. Two indexes are used per parameter:• The first index is for the slot value of the parameter• The second index is for the index value of the parameter
The data area contains the indexes 230 to 245 in slot 0 and is permanently assigned tothe configuration area.
Configuration area
Slot 0,
Index

User entry

190

Slot value for parameter 1

191

Index value for parameter 1

192

Slot value for parameter 2

193

Index value for parameter 2

Fixed
assignment

Data area
Slot 0,
Index

User entry→

230

Value for parameter-specificselection→

231

Value for parameter-specificselection→

245

Value for parameter-specificselection

194 to 219

86

220

Slot value for parameter 16

221

Index value for parameter 16

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

System integration

9.6.3

Configuring address shifting

When configuring, the specific slot and index values of the parameters must be entered in
the configuration area. This area can contain up to 32 entries for 16 parameters. Address
shifting configuration supports float- and integer-type parameters with read and write
access.
Address shifting can be configured via:
• Local display• Configuration tool (e.g. FieldCare/DeviceCare)• PROFIBUS master
Address shifting is configured in the menu Expert → Communication → Address shifting
configuration:
ExampleConfiguration area
Slot 0,
Index

Fixed
assignment

Entry = parameter

190

Slot shifting 1
parameter: 48

191

Index shifting 1
parameter: 24

192

Slot shifting 2
parameter: 48

193

Index shifting 2
parameter: 7

Data area
Slot 0,Index= Volume flow unit→

230

1349 = m³/h

= Temperature unit→

231

1001 = °C= Empty pipe detection→245

9 = On

194 to 219
220

Slot shifting 16
parameter: 54

221

Index shifting
16 parameter:
30

The entry values are taken from the device-specific slot/index table. The following excerpt
shows the values for the volume flow unit and the temperature unit in the example above.
Description

Slot

Index

Data type

Size[bytes]Range

Volume flow unit

48

24

Enum162...
1348 : m³/min
1349 : m³/h
1350 : m³/d...

Temperature unit

48

7

Enum1621001 : °C
1002 : °F
1000 : K
1003 : °R

For more information on the "slot/index table", please contact the Endress+Hauser
Sales Center.

9.6.4

Accessing data via PROFIBUS DP

The PROFIBUS master uses the indexes 230 to 245 in slot 0 to access the address shifting
data area. If, for example, slot 48, index 24 has been entered for the volume flow

Endress+Hauser

87

System integration

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

parameter via address shifting, the master can read out the current volume flow measured
value in slot 0 and index 230.
The data type (integer/float) and data access (read/write) depend on the parameter
entered in the configuration area. If the parameter entered supports read and write access,the parameter can also be read- and write-accessed via the data area.

88

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Commissioning

10

Commissioning

10.1

Function check

Before commissioning the measuring device:‣ Make sure that the post-installation and post-connection checks have been performed.
• "Post-installation check" checklist→  32
• "Post-connection check" checklist →  48

10.2

Switching on the measuring device‣ After a successful function check, switch on the measuring device.
 After a successful startup, the local display switches automatically from the startup
display to the operational display.
If nothing appears on the local display or a diagnostic message is displayed, refer tothe section on "Diagnostics and troubleshooting" →  141.

10.3

Connecting via FieldCare• For FieldCare →  70 connection• For connecting via FieldCare →  73
• For the FieldCare →  74 user interface

10.4

Configuring the device address via software

In the "Communication" submenu the device address can be set.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Communication → Device address

10.4.1PROFIBUS network

At time of delivery, the measuring device has the following factory setting:
Device address

126• To display the current device address: Device address parameter →  93
• If hardware addressing is active, software addressing is blocked →  46

10.5

Setting the operating language

Factory setting: English or ordered local language

Endress+Hauser

89Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DPXXXXXXXXX

20.50
XX

XX
Main menu
Display language

1.

0104-1EnglishOperation
Setup
Display language
Ã English
DeutschEspañol
Français2.

0104-1

Display language
Ã English
DeutschEspañol
Français

3.

0104-1

Hauptmenü
Sprache

4.

0104-1
DeutschBetrieb
Setup
A0029420

 24

Taking the example of the local display

10.6

Configuring the measuring device• The Setup menu with its guided wizards contains all the parameters needed for standard
operation.
• Navigation to the Setup menu
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
mA
1.

Main menu
Display language

0104-1EnglishDisplay/operat.
Setup

2.

Main menu
Display/operat.
Setup
Diagnostic

3.

/ ../Setup
Medium selection
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
A0032222-EN

 25

Taking the example of the local display

Depending on the device version, not all submenus and parameters are available inevery device. The selection can vary depending on the order code.

90

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Commissioning

Navigation"Setup" menu Setup
Device tag→  92‣ System units→  92‣ Communication→  93‣ Analog inputs→  95‣ I/O configuration→  95‣ Current input 1 to n

→  96‣ Status input 1 to n

→  97‣ Current output 1 to n

→  98‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output→  101‣ Relay output 1 to n

→  107‣ Display→  109‣ Low flow cut off→  111‣ Empty pipe detection→  113‣ Advanced setup→  114

1 to n10.6.1

Defining the tag nameTo enable fast identification of the measuring point within the system, you can enter aunique designation using the Device tag parameter and thus change the factory setting.
1

XXXXXXXXX

A0029422

 26
1

Header of the operational display with tag nameTag nameEnter the tag name in the "FieldCare" operating tool →  74

Endress+Hauser

91Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Navigation"Setup" menu → Device tag
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Device tag

Description

User entry

Enter the name for the measuring point.

10.6.2

Factory setting

Max. 32 characters, such as
letters, numbers or special
characters (e.g. @, %, /).

Promag300/500DP

Setting the system units

In the System units submenu the units of all the measured values can be set.
Depending on the device version, not all submenus and parameters are available inevery device. The selection can vary depending on the order code.
Navigation"Setup" menu → System units‣ System units
Volume flow unit

→  92

Volume unit

→  92

Conductivity unit

→  93Temperature unit

→  93Mass flow unit

→  93Mass unit→  93

Density unit

→  93

Corrected volume flow unit

→  93

Corrected volume unit

→  93

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Volume flow unit

Prerequisite–

Description
Select volume flow unit.

Selection
Unit choose list

Country-specific:• l/h• gal/min (us)Unit choose list

Country-specific:• m³• gal (us)ResultThe selected unit applies for:• Output• Low flow cut off• Simulation process variable
Volume unit

92–

Select volume unit.

Factory setting

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Parameter
Conductivity unit

Temperature unit

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

The On option is selected in
the Conductivity
measurement parameterparameter.

Select conductivity unit.

–

Select temperature unit.

Selection
Unit choose list

µS/cm

Unit choose list

Country-specific:
• °C
• °F

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• kg/h• lb/minEffectThe selected unit applies for:
Simulation process variable

ResultThe selected unit applies for:• Temperature parameter• Maximum value parameter• Minimum value parameter• External temperatureparameter• Maximum value parameter• Minimum value parameter
Mass flow unit–

Factory setting

Select mass flow unit.
ResultThe selected unit applies for:• Output• Low flow cut off• Simulation process variable

Mass unit–

Select mass unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:
• kg
• lb

Density unit–

Select density unit.

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• kg/l• lb/ft³

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• Nl/h• Sft³/h

Unit choose list

Country-specific:• Nm³• Sft³ResultThe selected unit applies for:• Output• Simulation process variable
Corrected volume flow unit–

Select corrected volume flowunit.
ResultThe selected unit applies for:
Corrected volume flow
parameter (→  132)

Corrected volume unit–

Select corrected volume unit.

10.6.3

Configuring communication interface

The Communication submenu guides you systematically through all the parameters thathave to be configured for selecting and setting the communication interface.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Communication‣ Communication
Device address

Endress+Hauser→  9493

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Device address

94

Description
Enter device address.

User entry
0 to 126

Factory setting
126

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

10.6.4

Commissioning

Configuring the analog inputs

The Analog inputs submenu guides the user systematically to the individual Analog input
1 to n submenu. From here you get to the parameters of the individual analog input.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Analog inputs‣ Analog inputs‣ Analog input 1 to n
Channel→  95PV filter time→  95Fail safe type→  95Fail-safe value→  95

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Channel–Select the process variable.

PV filter time–

Specify the time to suppress
Positive floatingsignal peaks. During thepoint number
specified time the analog input
does not respond to an erraticincrease in the process
variable.

0

Fail safe type–

Select the failure mode.

• Fail-safe value• Fallback value
• Off

Off

Fail-safe value

In Fail safe type parameter,
the Fail-safe value option is
selected.

Specify the values to be output
when an error occurs.

Signed floating-point
number0*• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Corrected
conductivity• Temperature• Electronic
temperature• Current input 1 *• Current input 2 *• Current input 3 *Factory setting
Volume flow

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.6.5

Displaying the I/O configuration

The I/O configuration submenu guides the user systematically through all the parametersin which the configuration of the I/O modules is displayed.
Endress+Hauser

95

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Navigation"Setup" menu → I/O configuration‣ I/O configuration
I/O module 1 to n terminal numbers→  96

I/O module 1 to n information→  96

I/O module 1 to n type→  96

Apply I/O configuration→  96

Alteration code→  96

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / Selection /User entry

Factory setting

I/O module 1 to n terminal numbers Shows the terminal numbers used by the I/O • Not used
module.
• 26-27 (I/O 1)• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

I/O module 1 to n information

Shows information of the plugged I/O
module.

• Not plugged• Invalid• Not configurable• Configurable• Profibus DP–

I/O module 1 to n typeShows the I/O module type.

• Off• Current output *• Current input *• Status input *• Pulse/frequency/switch
output *Off

Apply I/O configuration

Apply parameterization of the freely
configurable I/O module.

• No
• Yes

No

Alteration code

Enter the code in order to change the I/O
configuration.

Positive integer

0*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.6.6

Configuring the current input

The "Current input" wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters thathave to be set for configuring the current input.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Current input‣ Current input 1 to n
Terminal number96→  97

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Commissioning

Signal mode

→  970/4 mA value→  9720 mA value→  97

Current span

→  97

Failure mode

→  97

Failure value→  97

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

User interface /Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the current input
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Signal mode

The measuring device is not
approved for use in thehazardous area with type ofprotection Ex-i.

Select the signal mode for thecurrent input.

• Passive• Active

Active0/4 mA value–Enter 4 mA value.

Signed floating-point
number0

20 mA value–Enter 20 mA value.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameterCurrent span–

Select current range forprocess value output andupper/lower level for alarm
signal.

• 4...20 mA
Country-specific:• 4...20 mA NAMUR • 4...20 mA NAMUR• 4...20 mA US• 4...20 mA US• 0...20 mA

Failure mode–

Define input behavior in alarm
condition.

• Alarm• Last valid value• Defined value

Alarm

Failure value

In the Failure modeparameter, the Defined value
option is selected.

Enter value to be used by thedevice if input value fromexternal device is missing.

Signed floating-point
number0

10.6.7

Configuring the status input

The Status input submenu guides the user systematically through all the parameters thathave to be set for configuring the status input.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Status input‣ Status input 1 to n
Assign status input

Endress+Hauser→  9897

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Terminal number→  98

Active level→  98Terminal number→  98

Response time status input→  98Terminal number→  98Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / Selection /User entry

Factory setting

Terminal number

Shows the terminal numbers used by thestatus input module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Assign status input

Select function for the status input.

• Off• Reset totalizer 1• Reset totalizer 2• Reset totalizer 3• Reset all totalizers• Flow override

Off

Active level

Define input signal level at which theassigned function is triggered.

• High• Low

HighResponse time status input

Define the minimum amount of time the
5 to 200 ms
input signal level must be present before theselected function is triggered.

10.6.850 ms

Configuring the current output

The Current output wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that haveto be set for configuring the current output.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Current output‣ Current output 1 to n

98

Terminal number→  99Signal mode

→  99Assign current output 1 to n

→  99Current span

→  990/4 mA value→  9920 mA value→  99Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Commissioning

Fixed current→  99Damping output 1 to n

→  99Failure mode→  100

Failure current→  100

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

User interface /Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the current output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for thecurrent output.

• Passive• Active

ActiveAssign current output 1 to n–

Select process variable forcurrent output.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Electronic
temperature

Volume flow

Current span–

Select current range forprocess value output andupper/lower level for alarm
signal.

• 4...20 mA NAMUR Country-specific:• 4...20 mA US• 4...20 mA NAMUR• 4...20 mA• 4...20 mA US• 0...20 mA• Fixed current

0/4 mA value

One of the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  99):
• 4...20 mA NAMUR• 4...20 mA US• 4...20 mA• 0...20 mA

Enter 4 mA value.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)20 mA value

One of the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  99):
• 4...20 mA NAMUR• 4...20 mA US• 4...20 mA• 0...20 mA

Enter 20 mA value.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Fixed current

The Fixed current option is
selected in the Current spanparameter (→  99).

Defines the fixed output
current.

0 to 22.5 mA

22.5 mA

Damping output 1 to n

A process variable is selectedin the Assign current output
parameter (→  99) and oneof the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  99):
• 4...20 mA NAMUR• 4...20 mA US• 4...20 mA• 0...20 mA

Set reaction time for output
signal to fluctuations in themeasured value.

0.0 to 999.9 s

1.0 s

Endress+Hauser

99Commissioning

Parameter

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Prerequisite

Description

User interface /Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Failure mode

A process variable is selectedin the Assign current output
parameter (→  99) and oneof the following options isselected in the Current spanparameter (→  99):
• 4...20 mA NAMUR• 4...20 mA US• 4...20 mA• 0...20 mA

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Min.
• Max.
• Last valid value• Actual value• Defined value

Max.

Failure current

The Defined value option is
selected in the Failure modeparameter.

Enter current output value inalarm condition.

0 to 22.5 mA

22.5 mA*

100

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

10.6.9Commissioning

Configuring the pulse/frequency/switch output

The Pulse/frequency/switch output wizard guides you systematically through all theparameters that can be set for configuring the selected output type.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n→  101

Operating mode

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Operating mode

Description
Define the output as a pulse, frequency orswitch output.

Selection• Pulse• Frequency• Switch

Factory setting
Pulse

Configuring the pulse output
Navigation"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to nEndress+Hauser

Operating mode→  102

Terminal number→  102

Signal mode→  102

Assign pulse output→  102

Value per pulse→  102

Pulse width→  102

Failure mode→  102

Invert output signal→  102101

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Operating mode–

Define the output as a pulse,
frequency or switch output.

• Pulse• Frequency• Switch

Pulse

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the PFS output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for the
PFS output.

• Passive• Active

Passive

Assign pulse output 1 to n

The Pulse option is selected in
the Operating modeparameter parameter.

Select process variable forpulse output.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow

Off

Value per pulse

The Pulse option is selected in
the Operating modeparameter (→  101) and aprocess variable is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  102).

Enter measured value at which Signed floating-pointa pulse is output.
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Pulse width

The Pulse option is selected in
the Operating modeparameter (→  101) and aprocess variable is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  102).

Define time width of theoutput pulse.

0.05 to 2 000 ms

100 msFailure mode

The Pulse option is selected in
the Operating modeparameter (→  101) and aprocess variable is selected in
the Assign pulse output
parameter (→  102).

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual value• No pulses

No pulses

Invert output signal–

Invert the output signal.

• No
• Yes

No

Configuring the frequency output
Navigation"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n102

Operating mode→  103

Terminal number→  103

Signal mode→  103

Assign frequency output→  103

Minimum frequency value→  103

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Commissioning

Maximum frequency value→  103

Measuring value at minimum
frequency→  103

Measuring value at maximum
frequency→  104

Failure mode→  104

Failure frequency→  104

Invert output signal→  104

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Operating mode–

Define the output as a pulse,
frequency or switch output.

• Pulse• Frequency• Switch

Pulse

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the PFS output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for the
PFS output.

• Passive• Active

Passive

Assign frequency output

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  101)parameter.

Select process variable forfrequency output.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Electronic
temperature

Off

Minimum frequency value

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  101)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  103).

Enter minimum frequency.

0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz

0.0 HzMaximum frequency value

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  101)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  103).

Enter maximum frequency.

0.0 to 10 000.0 Hz

10 000.0 Hz

Measuring value at minimum
frequency

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  101)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  103).

Enter measured value forminmum frequency.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameterEndress+Hauser

103Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Measuring value at maximum
frequency

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  101)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  103).

Enter measured value for
maximum frequency.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Failure mode

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  101)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  103).

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual value• Defined value• 0 Hz

0 Hz

Failure frequency

The Frequency option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter (→  101)
and a process variable isselected in the Assign
frequency output parameter(→  103).

Enter frequency output value
in alarm condition.

0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz

0.0 HzInvert output signal–

Invert the output signal.

• No
• Yes

No

*

104

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Commissioning

Configuring the switch output
Navigation"Setup" menu → Pulse/frequency/switch output‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to nOperating mode→  105

Terminal number→  105

Signal mode→  105

Switch output function→  106

Assign diagnostic behavior→  106

Assign limit→  106

Assign flow direction check→  106

Assign status→  106

Switch-on value→  106

Switch-off value→  106

Switch-on delay→  106

Switch-off delay→  107

Failure mode→  107

Invert output signal→  107

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Operating mode–

Define the output as a pulse,
frequency or switch output.

• Pulse• Frequency• Switch

Pulse

Terminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the PFS output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Signal mode–

Select the signal mode for the
PFS output.

• Passive• Active

PassiveEndress+Hauser

105

Commissioning

Parameter

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Switch output function

The Switch option is selectedin the Operating modeparameter.

Select function for switch
output.

• Off• On• Diagnostic
behavior• Limit• Flow direction
check• Status

Off

Assign diagnostic behavior• In the Operating modeparameter, the Switch
option is selected.
• In the Switch output
function parameter, theDiagnostic behavior option
is selected.

Select diagnostic behavior forswitch output.

• Alarm• Alarm or warning• Warning

Alarm

Assign limit• The Switch option is
Select process variable for limit
selected in the Operating
function.
mode parameter parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameterparameter.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Electronic
temperature

Volume flow

Assign flow direction check• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Flow direction check
option is selected in the
Switch output function
parameter.

Select process variable for flow
direction monitoring.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow

Volume flow

Assign status• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Status option is
selected in the Switch
output function parameter.

Select device status for switch
output.

• Partially filled pipe Partially filled pipe
detection
detection• Low flow cut off• Digital output 3• Digital output 4• Digital output 5

Switch-on value• In the Operating modeparameter, the Switch
option is selected.
• In the Switch output
function parameter, theLimit option is selected.

Enter measured value for theswitch-on point.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)Switch-off value• In the Operating modeparameter, the Switch
option is selected.
• In the Switch output
function parameter, theLimit option is selected.

Enter measured value for theswitch-off point.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)Switch-on delay• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameter.

Define delay for the switch-onof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s

0.0 s

106

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Switch-off delay• The Switch option is
selected in the Operating
mode parameter.
• The Limit option is selectedin the Switch output
function parameter.

Define delay for the switch-offof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s

0.0 s

Failure mode–

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual status• Open• Closed

Open

Invert output signal–

Invert the output signal.

• No
• Yes

No

*

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.6.10 Configuring the relay output
The Relay output wizard guides the user systematically through all the parameters thathave to be set for configuring the relay output.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Relay output 1 to n

‣ RelaisOutput 1 to n

Endress+Hauser

Switch output function→  108

Assign flow direction check→  108

Assign limit→  108

Assign diagnostic behavior→  108

Assign status→  108

Switch-off value→  108

Switch-on value→  108

Failure mode→  108107

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Relay output function–

Select the function for therelay output.

• Closed• Open• Diagnostic
behavior• Limit• Flow direction
check• Digital Output

ClosedTerminal number–

Shows the terminal numbers
used by the relay output
module.

• Not used
• 24-25 (I/O 2)• 22-23 (I/O 3)–

Assign flow direction check

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Flow direction
check option is selected.

Select process variable for flow
direction monitoring.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow

Volume flow

Assign limit

The Limit option is selected in
the Relay output function
parameter parameter.

Select process variable for limit • Off
function.
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Electronic
temperature

Volume flow

Assign diagnostic behavior

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Diagnostic
behavior option is selected.

Select diagnostic behavior forswitch output.

• Alarm• Alarm or warning• Warning

Alarm

Assign status

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Digital Output
option is selected.

Select device status for switch
output.

• Partially filled pipe Partially filled pipe
detection
detection• Low flow cut off• Digital output 3• Digital output 4• Digital output 5

Switch-off value

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Enter measured value for theswitch-off point.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal(us)/min

Switch-off delay

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Define delay for the switch-offof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s

0.0 s

Switch-on value

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Enter measured value for theswitch-on point.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal(us)/min

Switch-on delay

In the Relay output function
parameter, the Limit option is
selected.

Define delay for the switch-onof status output.

0.0 to 100.0 s

0.0 s

Failure mode–

Define output behavior inalarm condition.

• Actual status• Open• Closed

Open

*

108

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Commissioning

10.6.11 Configuring the local display
The Display wizard guides you systematically through all the parameters that canconfigured for configuring the local display.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Display‣ Display
Format display→  109

Value 1 display→  109

0% bargraph value 1→  109

100% bargraph value 1→  110

Value 2 display→  110

Value 3 display→  1100% bargraph value 3→  110

100% bargraph value 3→  111

Value 4 display→  111

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Format display

A local display is provided.

Select how measured values
are shown on the display.

• 1 value, max. size
• 1 bargraph + 1value• 2 values• 1 value large + 2
values• 4 values

1 value, max. size

Value 1 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Electronic
temperature

Volume flow

0% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)Endress+Hauser

109

Commissioning

Parameter

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

100% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Value 2 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• None• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Corrected
conductivity• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *• Temperature• Electronic
temperature

None

Value 3 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• None• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Corrected
conductivity• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *• Temperature• Electronic
temperatureNone

0% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)110Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

100% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
number0

Value 4 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• None• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Corrected
conductivity• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *• Temperature• Electronic
temperature

None

*

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.6.12 Configuring the low flow cut off
The Low flow cut off wizard systematically guides the user through all the parametersthat must be set to configure low flow cut off.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Low flow cut off‣ Low flow cut off
Assign process variable→  111On value low flow cutoff→  111Off value low flow cutoff→  112Pressure shock suppression→  112

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Select process variable for low
flow cut off.

• Off
• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow

Volume flow

Positive floatingpoint number

Depends on country
and nominal
diameter

Assign process variable–

On value low flow cutoff

A process variable is selectedEnter on value for low flow cut
in the Assign process variable off.
parameter (→  111).

Endress+Hauser

Factory setting

111

Commissioning

Parameter

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Off value low flow cutoff

A process variable is selectedEnter off value for low flow cut 0 to 100.0 %in the Assign process variable off.
parameter (→  111).

50 %Pressure shock suppression

A process variable is selectedEnter time frame for signal
in the Assign process variable suppression (= active pressure
parameter (→  111).
shock suppression).

0s

112

0 to 100 s

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Commissioning

10.6.13 Configuring empty pipe detection
The Empty pipe detection submenu contains parameters that must be configured for theconfiguration of empty pipe detection.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Empty pipe detection‣ Empty pipe detection
Empty pipe detection→  113

New adjustment→  113

Progress→  113

Switch point empty pipe detection→  113

Response time empty pipe detection→  113

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / Userinterface / User
entry

Factory setting

Empty pipe detection–

Switch empty pipe detection on • Off
and off.
• On

Off

New adjustment

The On option is selected in
the Empty pipe detection
parameter.

Select type of adjustment.

• Cancel• Empty pipe adjust• Full pipe adjust

CancelProgress

The On option is selected in
the Empty pipe detection
parameter.

Shows the progress.

• Ok• Busy• Not ok–

Switch point empty pipe detection

The On option is selected in
the Empty pipe detection
parameter.

Enter hysteresis in %, below
this value the measuring tube
will detected as empty.

0 to 100 %10 %Response time empty pipe detection A process variable is selectedEnter the time before
in the Assign process variable diagnostic message S862 ' Pipeparameter (→  113).
empty'' is displayed for empty
pipe detection.

0 to 100 s

1s

Endress+Hauser

113

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

10.7

Advanced settings

The Advanced setup submenu together with its submenus contains parameters for
specific settings.
Navigation to the "Advanced setup" submenu
XXXXXXXXX

20.50
mA
1.

0104-1Main menu
Display language

EnglishDisplay/operat.
Setup
Main menu
Display/operat.
Setup

2.

Diagnostic/ ../Setup
Medium selection

3.

XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX/ ../Setup
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Advanced setup

4.

/ ../Advanced setup
Ent. access code5.

Device tag
Def. access code0092-1****
A0032223-EN

The number of submenus can vary depending on the device version. Some submenus
are not dealt with in the Operating Instructions. These submenus and the parameters
they contain are explained in the Special Documentation for the device.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup‣ Advanced setup
Enter access code

114

‣ Sensor adjustment→  115‣ Totalizer 1 to n

→  115‣ Display→  117‣ Electrode cleaning circuit→  120

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Commissioning‣ WLAN settings‣ Heartbeat setup

10.7.1‣ Configuration backup→  122‣ Administration→  124

Carrying out a sensor adjustment

The Sensor adjustment submenu contains parameters that pertain to the functionality ofthe sensor.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Sensor adjustment‣ Sensor adjustment→  115

Installation direction

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Installation direction

Description
Set sign of flow direction to match thedirection of the arrow on the sensor.

10.7.2

Selection

Factory setting• Flow in arrow direction
Flow in arrow direction• Flow against arrow direction

Configuring the totalizer

In the "Totalizer 1 to n" submenu the individual totalizer can be configured.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Totalizer 1 to n

‣ Totalizer 1 to n

Endress+Hauser

Assign process variable→  116

Unit totalizer→  116

Totalizer operation mode→  116

Control Totalizer 1 to n

→  138

Failure mode→  116115

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

Selection

Assign process variable

Select process variable for totalizer.

Unit totalizer

Select the unit for the process variable of the Unit choose list
totalizer.

Country-specific:
• m³
• ft³

Totalizer operation mode

Select totalizer calculation mode.

• Net flow total• Forward flow total• Reverse flow total• Last valid value

Net flow total

Failure mode

Define the totalizer behavior in the event ofa device alarm.

• Stop• Actual value• Last valid value

Actual value

116• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow

Factory setting
Volume flow

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

10.7.3

Commissioning

Carrying out additional display configurations

In the Display submenu you can set all the parameters associated with the configurationof the local display.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Display‣ Display

Endress+Hauser

Format display→  118

Value 1 display→  1180% bargraph value 1→  118

100% bargraph value 1→  118

Decimal places 1→  118

Value 2 display→  118

Decimal places 2→  118

Value 3 display→  1190% bargraph value 3→  119

100% bargraph value 3→  119

Decimal places 3→  119

Value 4 display→  119

Decimal places 4→  119

Display language→  120

Display interval→  120

Display damping→  120

Header→  120

Header text

→  120

Separator→  120

Backlight→  120117

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Format display

A local display is provided.

Select how measured values
are shown on the display.

• 1 value, max. size
• 1 bargraph + 1value• 2 values• 1 value large + 2
values• 4 values

1 value, max. size

Value 1 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Electronic
temperature

Volume flow

0% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)100% bargraph value 1

A local display is provided.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
numberDepends on country
and nominal
diameter

Decimal places 1

A measured value is specified
in the Value 1 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx

x.xx

Value 2 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• None• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Corrected
conductivity• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *• Temperature• Electronic
temperature

None

Decimal places 2

A measured value is specified
in the Value 2 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx

x.xx

118

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Value 3 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• None• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Corrected
conductivity• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *• Temperature• Electronic
temperatureNone

0% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 0% value for bar graphdisplay.

Signed floating-point
numberCountry-specific:• 0 l/h• 0 gal/min (us)100% bargraph value 3

A selection was made in the
Value 3 display parameter.

Enter 100% value for bar
graph display.

Signed floating-point
number0

Decimal places 3

A measured value is specified
in the Value 3 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx

x.xx

Value 4 display

A local display is provided.

Select the measured value thatis shown on the local display.

• None• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Corrected
conductivity• Totalizer 1• Totalizer 2• Totalizer 3• Current output 1• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *• Temperature• Electronic
temperature

None

Decimal places 4

A measured value is specified
in the Value 4 display
parameter.

Select the number of decimal
places for the display value.

• x
• x.x
• x.xx• x.xxx• x.xxxx

x.xx

Endress+Hauser

119Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry

Factory setting

Display language

A local display is provided.

Set display language.

• English• Deutsch *• Français *• Español *• Italiano *• Nederlands *• Portuguesa *• Polski *• русский язык(Russian) *• Svenska *• Türkçe *• 中文 (Chinese) *• 日本語(Japanese) *• 한국어 (Korean) *• ‫( الْعَرَبيّة‬Arabic) *• Bahasa Indonesia *• ภาษาไทย (Thai) *• tiếng Việt(Vietnamese) *• čeština (Czech) *English(alternatively, theordered language ispreset in the device)

Display interval

A local display is provided.

Set time measured values areshown on display if display
alternates between values.

1 to 10 s

5s

Display damping

A local display is provided.

Set display reaction time tofluctuations in the measured
value.

0.0 to 999.9 s

0.0 s

Header

A local display is provided.

Select header contents on local • Device tag
display.
• Free text

Device tag

Header text

In the Header parameter, theFree text option is selected.

Enter display header text.

Max. 12 characterssuch as letters,
numbers or special
characters (e.g. @,%, /)------------

Separator

A local display is provided.

Select decimal separator for
displaying numerical values.

• . (point)• , (comma). (point)

Backlight

One of the following
conditions is met:
• Order code for "Display;
operation", option F "4-line,
illum.; touch control"• Order code for "Display;
operation", option G "4-line,
illum.; touch control+WLAN"• Order code for "Display;
operation", option O"Separate 4-line display,illum.; 10m/30ft cable;
touch control"

Switch the local display
backlight on and off.

• Disable• Enable

Enable*Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.7.4

Performing electrode cleaning

The Electrode cleaning circuit submenu contains parameters that must be configured forthe configuration of electrode cleaning.
The submenu is only available if the device was ordered with electrode cleaning.

120

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Commissioning

Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Electrode cleaning circuit‣ Electrode cleaning circuit
Electrode cleaning circuit→  121

ECC duration→  121

ECC recovery time→  121

ECC cleaning cycle→  121

ECC Polarity→  121

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Electrode cleaning circuit

For the following order code:"Application package", option
EC "ECC electrode cleaning"

Enable the cyclic electrodecleaning circuit.

ECC duration

For the following order code:"Application package", option
EC "ECC electrode cleaning"

Enter the duration of electrode 0.01 to 30 s
cleaning in seconds.

2s

ECC recovery time

For the following order code:"Application package", option
EC "ECC electrode cleaning"

Define recovery time after
electrode cleaning. During thistime the current output values
will be held at last valid value.

1 to 600 s

60 s

ECC cleaning cycle

For the following order code:"Application package", option
EC "ECC electrode cleaning"

Enter the pause duration
between electrode cleaning
cycles.

0.5 to 168 h

0.5 h

ECC Polarity

For the following order code:"Application package", option
EC "ECC electrode cleaning"

Select the polarity of theelectrode cleaning circuit.

• Positive• Negative

Depends on theelectrode material:• Platinum:
Negative option• Tantalum, Alloy
C22, stainlesssteel: Positive
option10.7.5• Off• On

Factory setting

Off

WLAN configuration

The WLAN Settings submenu guides the user systematically through all the parametersthat have to be set for the WLAN configuration.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → WLAN Settings‣ WLAN settings
WLAN IP address

Endress+Hauser→  122121

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Security type→  122WLAN passphrase→  122

Assign SSID name→  122

SSID name→  122

Apply changes→  122

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

User entry /Selection

Factory setting

WLAN IP address–Enter IP address of the device
WLAN interface.

4 octet: 0 to 255 (inthe particular octet)

192.168.1.212

Network security–

Select the security type of the
WLAN network.

• Unsecured• WPA2-PSK• EAP-PEAP withMSCHAPv2• EAP-PEAP
MSCHAPv2 noserver authentic.
• EAP-TLS

WPA2-PSKWLAN passphrase

The WPA2-PSK option is
selected in the Security typeparameter.

Enter the network key (8 to 32 8 to 32-digit
characters).
character string
comprising numbers,
The network key
supplied with the device letters and special
charactersshould be changedSerial number of themeasuring device(e.g. L100A802000)

during commissioning
for security reasons.
Assign SSID name–

Select which name will be used • Device tag
for SSID: device tag or user• User-defined
defined name.

SSID name• The User-defined option is Enter the user-defined SSID
selected in the Assign SSID name (max. 32 characters).
name parameter parameter.
The user-defined SSID
• The WLAN access point
name may only be
option is selected in theassigned once. If the SSIDWLAN mode parametername is assigned moreparameter.
than once, the devices
can interfere with one
another.

Max. 32-digit
character string
comprising numbers,letters and special
characters

EH_devicedesignation_last 7
digits of the serial
number (e.g.
EH_Promag_300_A
802000)–• Cancel• Ok

Cancel

Apply changes

10.7.6

Use changed WLAN settings.

User-definedConfiguration management

After commissioning, you can save the current device configurationor restore the previous
device configuration.
You can do so using the Configuration management parameter and the related options
found in the Configuration backup submenu.

122

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Commissioning

Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Configuration backup‣ Configuration backup
Operating time→  123

Last backup→  123

Configuration management→  123

Backup state→  123

Comparison result→  123

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / Selection

Factory setting

Operating time

Indicates how long the device has been in
operation.

Days (d), hours (h), minutes(m) and seconds (s)–Last backup

Shows when the last data backup was saved
to HistoROM backup.

Days (d), hours (h), minutes(m) and seconds (s)–Configuration management

Select action for managing the device data in • Cancel
the HistoROM backup.
• Execute backup• Restore• Compare• Clear backup data

CancelBackup stateShows the current status of data saving or
restoring.

• None• Backup in progress• Restoring in progress• Delete in progress• Compare in progress• Restoring failed• Backup failed

None

Comparison result

Comparison of current device data with
HistoROM backup.

• Settings identical• Settings not identical• No backup available• Backup settings corrupt• Check not done
• Dataset incompatible

Check not done

Function scope of the "Configuration management" parameter

Endress+Hauser

Options

Description

CancelNo action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

Execute backup

A backup copy of the current device configuration is saved from the HistoROM
backup to the memory of the device. The backup copy includes the transmitter dataof the device.

RestoreThe last backup copy of the device configuration is restored from the device
memory to the device's HistoROM backup. The backup copy includes thetransmitter data of the device.

123

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Options

Description

CompareThe device configuration saved in the device memory is compared with the current
device configuration of the HistoROM backup.

Clear backup data

The backup copy of the device configuration is deleted from the memory of thedevice.

HistoROM backup
A HistoROM is a "non-volatile" device memory in the form of an EEPROM.
While this action is in progress, the configuration cannot be edited via the local
display and a message on the processing status appears on the display.

10.7.7

Using parameters for device administration

The Administration submenu systematically guides the user through all the parametersthat can be used for device administration purposes.
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration‣ Administration‣ Define access code→  124‣ Reset access code→  125

Device reset→  125

Using the parameter to define the access code
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration → Define access code

‣ Define access code
Define access code→  124

Confirm access code→  124

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User entry

Define access code

Restrict write-access to parameters to protect the configurationof the device against unintentional changes.

Max. 16-digit character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special characters

Confirm access code

Confirm the entered access code.

Max. 16-digit character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special characters

124

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Commissioning

Using the parameter to reset the access code
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration → Reset access code

‣ Reset access code
Operating time→  125

Reset access code→  125

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface / User entry

Factory setting

Operating time

Indicates how long the device has been in
operation.

Days (d), hours (h), minutes(m) and seconds (s)–Reset access code

Reset access code to factory settings.

Character string comprisingnumbers, letters and special
characters

0x00



For a reset code, contact yourEndress+Hauser service organization.

The reset code can only be entered via:
• Web browser• DeviceCare, FieldCare (via service
interface CDI-RJ45)• Fieldbus

Using the parameter to reset the device
Navigation"Setup" menu → Advanced setup → Administration
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Device reset

Description
Reset the device configuration - either
entirely or in part - to a defined state.

10.8

Selection• Cancel• To delivery settings• Restart device• Restore S-DAT backup

Factory setting
CancelSimulation

The Simulation submenu enables you to simulate, without a real flow situation, various
process variables in the process and the device alarm mode and to verify downstream
signal chains (switching valves or closed-control loops).
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Simulation‣ Simulation
Assign simulation process variable

Endress+Hauser→  126125

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Process variable value→  126

Status input simulation→  127

Input signal level→  127

Current input 1 to n simulation→  127

Value current input 1 to n

→  127

Current output 1 to n simulation→  127

Value current output 1 to n

→  127

Frequency output simulation 1 to n

→  127

Frequency value 1 to n

→  127

Pulse output simulation 1 to n

→  127

Pulse value 1 to n

→  127

Switch output simulation 1 to n

→  127

Switch status 1 to n

→  127

Relay output 1 to n simulation→  127

Switch status 1 to n

→  127

Device alarm simulation→  127

Diagnostic event category→  128

Diagnostic event simulation→  128

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

Assign simulation process variable–

Select a process variable forthe simulation process that is
activated.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *Off

Process variable value

A process variable is selectedin the Assign simulation
process variable parameter(→  126).

Enter the simulation value forthe selected process variable.

Depends on theprocess variableselected

0126

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Parameter

Commissioning

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Switch simulation of the status • Off
input on and off.
• On

Factory setting

Status input simulation–

Input signal level

In the Status input simulation Select the signal level for theparameter, the On option issimulation of the status input.
selected.

• High• Low

HighCurrent input 1 to n simulation–

Switch simulation of thecurrent input on and off.

• Off
• On

Off

Value current input 1 to n

In the Current input 1 to nsimulation parameter, the On
option is selected.

Enter the current value forsimulation.

0 to 22.5 mA

0 mA

Current output 1 to n simulation–

Switch the simulation of thecurrent output on and off.

• Off
• On

Off

Value current output 1 to n

In the Current output 1 to nsimulation parameter, the On
option is selected.

Enter the current value forsimulation.

3.59 to 22.5 mA

3.59 mA

Frequency output simulation 1 to n

In the Operating modeparameter, the Frequency
option is selected.

Switch the simulation of thefrequency output on and off.

• Off
• On

Off

Frequency value 1 to n

In the Frequency output
simulation 1 to n parameter,
the On option is selected.

Enter the frequency value forthe simulation.

0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz

0.0 HzPulse output simulation 1 to n

In the Operating modeparameter, the Pulse option is
selected.

Set and switch off the pulse
output simulation.

• Off• Fixed value• Down-counting
value

Off

For Fixed value option:
 Pulsewidth parameterOff(→  102) defines thepulse width of the pulses
output.
Pulse value 1 to n

In the Pulse output
simulation 1 to n parameter,
the Down-counting value
option is selected.

Enter the number of pulses for
simulation.

0 to 65 535

0

Switch output simulation 1 to n

In the Operating modeparameter, the Switch option
is selected.

Switch the simulation of theswitch output on and off.

• Off
• On

Off

Switch status 1 to n–

Select the status of the status
output for the simulation.

• Open• Closed

Open

Relay output 1 to n simulation–

Switch simulation of the relay
output on and off.

• Off
• On

Off

Switch status 1 to n

The On option is selected in
the Switch output simulation
1 to n parameter parameter.

Select status of the relay
output for the simulation.

• Open• Closed

Open

Pulse output simulation–

Set and switch off the pulse
output simulation.

• Off• Fixed value• Down-counting
value

Off

0 to 65 535

0

Fixed value option:
 For
Pulse width parameter
defines the pulse widthof the pulses output.
Pulse value

In the Pulse output
simulation parameter, theDown-counting value option
is selected.

Set and switch off the pulse
output simulation.

Device alarm simulation–

Switch the device alarm on and • Off
off.
• On

Endress+Hauser

Off

127

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

Diagnostic event category–

Select a diagnostic event
category.

• Sensor• Electronics• Configuration• ProcessProcess

Diagnostic event simulation–

Select a diagnostic event tosimulate this event.

• Off• Diagnostic event
picklist (depends
on the category
selected)

Off

Logging interval–

Define the logging interval tlog 1.0 to 3 600.0 s
for data logging. This value
defines the time interval
between the individual data
points in the memory.

*–

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

10.9

Protecting settings from unauthorized access

The following write protection options exist in order to protect the configuration of themeasuring device from unintentional modification:• Protect access to parameters via access code →  128• Protect access to local operation via key locking →  63
• Protect access to measuring device via write protection switch →  129

10.9.1

Write protection via access code

The effects of the user-specific access code are as follows:• Via local operation, the parameters for the measuring device configuration are writeprotected and their values can no longer be changed.
• Device access is protected via the Web browser, as are the parameters for the measuring
device configuration.
• Device access is protected via FieldCare or DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), as
are the parameters for the measuring device configuration.
Defining the access code via local display
1.

Navigate to the Define access code parameter (→  124).

2.

Define a max. 16-digit character string comprising numbers, letters and special
characters as the access code.

3.

Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter (→  124) toconfirm the code.
 The -symbol appears in front of all write-protected parameters.

The device automatically locks the write-protected parameters again if a key is not pressedfor 10 minutes in the navigation and editing view. The device locks the write-protectedparameters automatically after 60 s if the user skips back to the operational display mode
from the navigation and editing view.
• If parameter write protection is activated via an access code, it can also only be
deactivated via this access code →  62.
• The user role with which the user is currently logged on via the local display is
indicated by the →  62 Access status parameter. Navigation path: Operation→ Access status

128

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Commissioning

Parameters which can always be modified via the local display
Certain parameters that do not affect the measurement are excepted from parameter write
protection via the local display. Despite the user-specific access code, they can always be
modified, even if the other parameters are locked.

Language

Parameters for configuring
the local display

Parameters for configuring
the totalizer↓↓

Format display

Control Totalizer

Contrast display

Preset value

Display interval

Defining the access code via the Web browser
1.

Navigate to the Define access code parameter (→  124).

2.

Define a max. 16-digit numeric code as an access code.

3.

Enter the access code again in the Confirm access code parameter (→  124) toconfirm the code.
 The Web browser switches to the login page.
If no action is performed for 10 minutes, the Web browser automatically returns to
the login page.
• If parameter write protection is activated via an access code, it can also only be
deactivated via this access code →  62.
• The user role with which the user is currently logged on via Web browser isindicated by the Access status parameter. Navigation path: Operation → AccessstatusResetting the access code
If you misplace the user-specific access code, it is possible to reset the code to the factory
setting. A reset code must be entered for this purpose. The user-specific access code canthen be defined again afterwards.
Via Web browser, FieldCare, DeviceCare (via CDI-RJ45 service interface), fieldbus
For a reset code, contact your Endress+Hauser service organization.
1.

Navigate to the Reset access code parameter (→  125).

2.

Enter the reset code.
 The access code has been reset to the factory setting 0000. It can be redefined→  128.

10.9.2

Write protection via write protection switch

Unlike parameter write protection via a user-specific access code, this allows write accessto the entire operating menu - except for the "Contrast display" parameter - to be locked.
The parameter values are now read only and cannot be edited any more (exception"Contrast display" parameter):• Via local display• Via PROFIBUS DP protocol

Endress+Hauser

129

Commissioning

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

1.
OFF ON
1
2
3
4

A0029630

Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the ON
position enables hardware write protection.
 In the Locking status parameter the Hardware locked option is displayed→  131. In addition, on the local display the -symbol appears in front of theparameters in the header of the operational display and in the navigation view.

XXXXXXXXX

20.50
XX

XX
A00294252.

130

Setting the write protection (WP) switch on the main electronics module to the OFF
position (factory setting) disables hardware write protection.
 No option is displayed in the Locking status parameter →  131. On the local
display, the -symbol disappears from in front of the parameters in the headerof the operational display and in the navigation view.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Operation

11

Operation

11.1

Reading the device locking status

Device active write protection: Locking status parameter
Operation → Locking status
Function scope of the "Locking status" parameter
Options

Description

None

The access status displayed in the Access status parameter applies →  62. Only
appears on local display.

Hardware locked

The DIP switch for hardware locking is activated on the PCB board. This locks write
access to the parameters (e.g. via local display or operating tool) .

Temporarily locked

Write access to the parameters is temporarily locked on account of internal
processes running in the device (e.g. data upload/download, reset etc.). Once theinternal processing has been completed, the parameters can be changed once
again.

11.2

Adjusting the operating language

Detailed information:• To configure the operating language →  89
• For information on the operating languages supported by the measuring device→  206

11.3

Configuring the display

Detailed information:• On the basic settings for the local display →  109• On the advanced settings for the local display →  117

11.4

Reading measured values

With the Measured values submenu, it is possible to read all the measured values.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values‣ Measured values

Endress+Hauser‣ Process variables→  132‣ Totalizer 1 to n

→  133‣ Input values→  134‣ Output values→  135

131

Operation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

11.4.1"Process variables" submenu

The Process variables submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for each process variable.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Process variables‣ Process variables
Volume flow

→  132

Mass flow→  132

Corrected volume flow

→  132

Flow velocity→  132

Conductivity→  132

Corrected conductivity→  133

Temperature→  133

Density→  133

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Volume flow

Prerequisite–

Description
Displays the volume flow currently
measured.

User interface
Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from the Volume flow
unit parameter (→  92).
Mass flow–

Displays the mass flow currently
calculated.

Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from the Mass flow
unit parameter (→  93).
Corrected volume flow–

Displays the corrected volume flow
currently calculated.

Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from the Correctedvolume flow unit parameter(→  93).
Flow velocity–

Displays the flow velocity currently
calculated.

Signed floating-point
numberConductivity–

Displays the conductivity currently
measured.

Signed floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from the Conductivity
unit parameter (→  93).

132

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Parameter
Corrected conductivity

TemperatureDensity

Operation

Prerequisite
One of the following conditions is met:
• Order code for "Sensor option", option
CI "Medium temperature
measurement"or• The temperature is read into theflowmeter from an external device.

Description
Displays the conductivity currently
corrected.

User interface
Positive floating-point
numberDependency
The unit is taken from the Conductivity
unit parameter (→  93).

One of the following conditions is met:
• Order code for "Sensor option", option
CI "Medium temperature
measurement"or• The temperature is read into theflowmeter from an external device.

Displays the temperature currently
calculated.

Positive floating-point
number–

Displays the current fixed density or
Signed floating-point
density read in from an external device. number

Dependency
The unit is taken from theTemperature unit parameter(→  93).

Dependency
The unit is taken from the Density unit
parameter.

11.4.2

Totalizer

The Totalizer submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for every totalizer.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Totalizer 1 to n

‣ Totalizer 1 to n

Endress+Hauser

Assign process variable→  134

Totalizer value 1 to n

→  134

Totalizer status 1 to n

→  134

Totalizer status (Hex) 1 to n

→  134

133

Operation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Assign process variable–

Totalizer value 1 to n

Description

Select process variable fortotalizer.

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow

Volume flow

In the Assign process variable Displays the current totalizer
parameter one of the following counter value.
options is selected:• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Total mass flow
• Condensate mass flow
• Energy flow
• Heat flow difference

Signed floating-point
number0 m³

Totalizer status 1 to n–

Displays the current totalizer
status.

• Good• Uncertain
• Bad

–

Totalizer status (Hex) 1 to n

In Target mode parameter,
the Auto option is selected.

Displays the current statusvalue (hex) of the totalizer.

0 to 0xFF–

11.4.3"Input values" submenu

The Input values submenu guides you systematically to the individual input values.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values‣ Input values‣ Current input 1 to n

→  134‣ Status input 1 to n

→  135

Input values of current input
The Current input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every current input.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values → Current input 1 to n

‣ Current input 1 to n

134

Measured values 1 to n

→  135

Measured current 1 to n

→  135

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Operation

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Measured values 1 to n

Displays the current input value.

Signed floating-point number

Measured current 1 to n

Displays the current value of the current input.

0 to 22.5 mA

Input values of status input
The Status input 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every status input.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Input values → Status input 1 to n

‣ Status input 1 to n
→  135

Value status input

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Value status input

Description
Shows the current input signal level.

11.4.4User interface• High• Low

Output values

The Output values submenu contains all the parameters needed to display the current
measured values for every output.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values‣ Output values‣ Current output 1 to n

→  135‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output→  136‣ Relay output 1 to n

→  136

1 to nOutput values of current output
The Value current output submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every current output.

Endress+Hauser

135

Operation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Value current output 1 to n

‣ Current output 1 to n
Output current 1 to n

→  136

Measured current 1 to n

→  136

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Output current 1

Displays the current value currently calculated for the current
output.

3.59 to 22.5 mA

Measured current

Displays the current value currently measured for the current
output.

0 to 30 mA

Output values for pulse/frequency/switch output
The Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed
to display the current measured values for every pulse/frequency/switch output.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to n‣ Pulse/frequency/switch output
1 to nOutput frequency 1 to n

→  136

Pulse output 1 to n

→  136

Switch status 1 to n

→  136

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Output frequency 1 to n

In the Operating mode parameter, theFrequency option is selected.

Displays the value currently measured
for the frequency output.

Pulse output 1 to n

The Pulse option is selected in the
Displays the pulse frequency currently
Operating mode parameter parameter. output.

Positive floating-point
number

Switch status 1 to n

The Switch option is selected in the
Operating mode parameter.

• Open• Closed

Displays the current switch output
status.

User interface
0.0 to 12 500.0 Hz

Output values for relay output
The Relay output 1 to n submenu contains all the parameters needed to display thecurrent measured values for every relay output.

136

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Operation

Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Measured values → Output values → Relay output 1 to n

‣ Relay output 1 to n
Switch status→  137

Switch cycles→  137

Max. switch cycles number→  137

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Switch status

Shows the current relay switch status.

• Open• Closed

Switch cycles

Shows number of all performed switch cycles.

Positive integer

Max. switch cycles number

Shows the maximal number of guaranteed switch cycles.

Positive integer

11.5

Adapting the measuring device to the process
conditions

The following are available for this purpose:• Basic settings using theSetup menu (→  90)• Advanced settings using theAdvanced setup submenu (→  114)

11.6

Performing a totalizer reset

The totalizers are reset in the Operation submenu:
Control Totalizer 1 to nFunction scope of the "Control Totalizer " parameter
Options

Description

Totalize

The totalizer is started.

Reset + hold

The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is reset to 0.

Preset + hold

The totaling process is stopped and the totalizer is set to its defined start value
from the Preset value 1 to n parameter.

Navigation"Operation" menu → Totalizer handling‣ Totalizer handlingControl Totalizer 1 to n

Endress+Hauser→  138137

Operation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Preset value 1 to n

→  138

Reset all totalizers→  138

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

Selection / User entry

Factory setting

Control Totalizer 1 to nControl totalizer value.

• Totalize• Reset + hold
• Preset + holdTotalize

Preset value 1 to nSpecify start value for totalizer.

Signed floating-point number

0 m³

Reset all totalizers

Reset all totalizers to 0 and start.

• Cancel• Reset + totalize

Cancel11.7

Showing data logging

The Extended HistoROM application package must be enabled in the device (order
option) for the Data logging submenu to appear. This contains all the parameters for themeasured value history.
Data logging is also available via:
• Plant Asset Management Tool FieldCare →  72.
• Web browser
Function range• A total of 1000 measured values can be stored• 4 logging channels• Adjustable logging interval for data logging• Display of the measured value trend for each logging channel in the form of a chart/ ../XXXXXXXX
175.7740.69 l/h
-100s

0A0034352• x-axis: depending on the number of channels selected displays 250 to 1000 measured
values of a process variable.
• y-axis: displays the approximate measured value span and constantly adapts this to theongoing measurement.
If the length of the logging interval or the assignment of the process variables to thechannels is changed, the content of the data logging is deleted.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Data logging‣ Data logging

138

Assign channel 1→  139

Assign channel 2→  139

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Operation

Assign channel 3→  140

Assign channel 4→  140

Logging interval→  140

Clear logging data

→  140

Data logging→  140

Logging delay→  140

Data logging control→  140

Data logging status→  140

Entire logging duration→  140‣ Display channel 1‣ Display channel 2‣ Display channel 3‣ Display channel 4
Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Prerequisite

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

Assign channel 1

The Extended HistoROM
application package isavailable.

Assign process variable tologging channel.

• Off• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume
flow• Flow velocity• Conductivity *• Electronic
temperature• Current output 1• Current output 2 *• Current output 3 *• Current output 4 *OffAssign channel 2

The Extended HistoROM
application package isavailable.

Assign process variable tologging channel.

Picklist, see Assign
Offchannel 1 parameter(→  139)

software options
 The
currently enabled are
displayed in the
Software option
overview parameter.

Endress+Hauser

139

Operation

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Parameter

Assign channel 3

Prerequisite

The Extended HistoROM
application package isavailable.

Description

Selection / User
entry / Userinterface

Factory setting

Assign process variable tologging channel.

Picklist, see Assign
Offchannel 1 parameter(→  139)

Assign process variable tologging channel.

Picklist, see Assign
Offchannel 1 parameter(→  139)

software options
 The
currently enabled are
displayed in the
Software option
overview parameter.
Assign channel 4

The Extended HistoROM
application package isavailable.
software options
 The
currently enabled are
displayed in the
Software option
overview parameter.

Logging interval

The Extended HistoROM
application package isavailable.

Define the logging interval fordata logging. This value
defines the time interval
between the individual data
points in the memory.

0.1 to 3 600.0 s

1.0 s

Clear logging data

The Extended HistoROM
application package isavailable.

Clear the entire logging data.

• Cancel• Clear data

CancelData logging–

Select the data logging
method.

• Overwriting• Not overwriting

Overwriting

Logging delay

In the Data logging
parameter, the Not
overwriting option is selected.

Enter the time delay formeasured value logging.

0 to 999 h

0h

Data logging control

In the Data logging
parameter, the Not
overwriting option is selected.

Start and stop measured value
logging.

• None• Delete + start• StopNone

Data logging status

In the Data logging
parameter, the Not
overwriting option is selected.

Displays the measured value
logging status.

• Done• Delay active• Active• Stopped

Done

Entire logging duration

In the Data logging
parameter, the Not
overwriting option is selected.

Displays the total logging
duration.

Positive floatingpoint number

0s

*

140

Visibility depends on order options or device settings

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.1

General troubleshooting

For local display
Error

Possible causes

Solution

Local display dark and no output
signals

Supply voltage does not match thevalue indicated on the nameplate.

Apply the correct supply voltage→  38.

Local display dark and no output
signals

The polarity of the supply voltage is Correct the polarity.
wrong.

Local display dark and no output
signals

No contact between connecting
cables and terminals.

Check the connection of the cables
and correct if necessary.

Local display dark and no output
signals

Terminals are not plugged into the
I/O electronics module correctly.
Terminals are not plugged into themain electronics module correctly.

Check terminals.

Local display dark and no output
signals

I/O electronics module is defective.
Main electronics module isdefective.

Order spare part →  183.

Local display is dark, but signal
output is within the valid range

Display is set too bright or too dark. • Set the display brighter bysimultaneously pressing  + .
• Set the display darker bysimultaneously pressing  + .

Local display is dark, but signal
output is within the valid range

The cable of the display module isnot plugged in correctly.

Insert the plug correctly into themain electronics module anddisplay module.

Local display is dark, but signal
output is within the valid range

Display module is defective.

Order spare part →  183.

Backlighting of local display is red

Diagnostic event with "Alarm"
diagnostic behavior has occurred.

Take remedial measures

Text on local display appears in aforeign language and cannot be
understood.

Incorrect operating language isconfigured.

1. Press  +  for 2 s ("homeposition").
2. Press .
3. Set the desired language in the
Display language parameter(→  120).

Message on local display:"Communication Error""Check Electronics"

Communication between thedisplay module and the electronics
is interrupted.

• Check the cable and theconnector between the mainelectronics module and display
module.
• Order spare part →  183.

Possible causes

Solution

For output signals
Error
Signal output outside the valid
range

Endress+Hauser

Main electronics module isdefective.

Order spare part →  183.

Device shows correct value on local Configuration error
display, but signal output isincorrect, though in the valid range.

Check and correct the parameter
configuration.

Device measures incorrectly.

1. Check and correct parameter
configuration.
2. Observe limit values specified inthe "Technical Data".

Configuration error or device isoperated outside the application.

141

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

For access
Error

Possible causes

Solution

No write access to parameters

Hardware write protection enabled

Set the write protection switch on
main electronics module to the OFF
position →  129.

No write access to parameters

Current user role has limited accessauthorization

1. Check user role →  62.
2. Enter correct customer-specificaccess code →  62.

No connection via PROFIBUS DPPROFIBUS DP bus cable connected
incorrectly

Check terminal assignment→  36.

No connection via PROFIBUS DPPROFIBUS DP cable incorrectly
terminatedCheck terminating resistor .

Not connecting to Web server

Web server disabled

Using the "FieldCare" or "DeviceCare"
operating tool, check whether the
Web server of the measuring device
is enabled, and enable it ifnecessary→  69.

Incorrect setting for the Ethernet
interface of the computer

1. Check the properties of theInternet protocol (TCP/IP) →  65.
2. Check the network settings with
the IT manager.

Not connecting to Web server

Incorrect IP address

Check the IP address:
192.168.1.212 →  65

Not connecting to Web server

Incorrect WLAN access data

• Check WLAN network status.
• Log on to the device again using
WLAN access data.
• Verify that WLAN is enabled on
the measuring device andoperating device .

WLAN communication disabled–

Not connecting to Web server,
FieldCare or DeviceCare

No WLAN network available• Check if WLAN reception ispresent: LED on display module
is lit blue
• Check if WLAN connection isenabled: LED on display module
flashes blue
• Switch on instrument function.

Network connection not present or
unstable

WLAN network is weak.

• Operating device is outside ofreception range: Check network
status on operating device.
• To improve network
performance, use an external
WLAN antenna.

Parallel WLAN and Ethernet
communication• Check network settings.
• Temporarily enable only the
WLAN as an interface.

Data transfer active

Wait until data transfer or current
action is finished.

Connection lost

1. Check cable connection andpower supply.
2. Refresh the Web browser andrestart if necessary.

Not using optimum version of Web
server.

1. Use the correct Web browser
version .
2. Clear the Web browser cache andrestart the Web browser.

Unsuitable view settings.

Change the font size/display ratioof the Web browser.

Web browser frozen and operation
no longer possible

Content of Web browser
incomplete or difficult to read142

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Error

Endress+Hauser

Possible causes

Solution

No or incomplete display ofcontents in the Web browser• JavaScript not enabled• JavaScript cannot be enabled

1. Enable JavaScript.
2. Enter http://XXX.XXX.X.XXX/
basic.html as the IP address.

Operation with FieldCare or
DeviceCare via CDI-RJ45 service
interface (port 8000)

Firewall of computer or network ispreventing communication

Depending on the settings of thefirewall used on the computer or in
the network, the firewall must be
adapted or disabled to allow
FieldCare/DeviceCare access.

Flashing of firmware with FieldCare Firewall of computer or network isor DeviceCare via CDI-RJ45 service
preventing communicationinterface (via port 8000 or TFTP
ports)

Depending on the settings of thefirewall used on the computer or in
the network, the firewall must be
adapted or disabled to allow
FieldCare/DeviceCare access.

143

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

12.2

Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes

12.2.1

Transmitter

Different LEDs in the transmitter provide information on the device status.

1 2 3 4 5A0029629

1
2
3
4
5

Supply voltage
Device status
Not usedCommunication
Service interface (CDI) active, Ethernet Link/Activity

LED
1

2

Device status

Meaning

Off

Supply voltage is off or too low.

Green

Supply voltage is ok.

Off

Firmware error

Green

Device status is ok.

Flashing green

Device is not configured.

Red

A diagnostic event with "Alarm" diagnostic behavior
has occurred.

Flashing red

A diagnostic event with "Warning" diagnostic
behavior has occurred.

Flashing red/green

The device restarts.

3

Not used––4

Communication

Off

Device does not receive any Profibus data.

White

Device receives Profibus data.

OffNot connected or no connection established.

Yellow

Connected and connection established.

Flashing yellow

Service interface active.

5

144

Supply voltage

Color

Service interface (CDI),
Ethernet Link/Activity

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.3

Diagnostic information on local display

12.3.1

Diagnostic message

Faults detected by the self-monitoring system of the measuring device are displayed as adiagnostic message in alternation with the operational display.
Operational display in alarm condition

Diagnostic message

2 1

XXXXXXXXX

S

20.50

S801

3
4

Supply voltage

XX

X

S

XXXXXXXXX

i

Menu

5
A0029426-EN

1
2
3
4
5

Status signal
Diagnostic behavior
Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code
Short text
Operating elements

If two or more diagnostic events are pending simultaneously, only the message of thediagnostic event with the highest priority is shown.
Other diagnostic events that have occurred can be displayed in the Diagnostics menu:• Via parameter• Via submenus →  176
Status signals
The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by
categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event).
The status signals are categorized according to VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR
Recommendation NE 107: F = Failure, C = Function Check, S = Out of Specification, M= Maintenance Required
SymbolMeaning
FailureA device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.
Function check
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).
Out of specification
The device is operated:
Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)
Maintenance required
Maintenance is required. The measured value remains valid.

Endress+Hauser

145

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostic behavior
SymbolMeaning
Alarm• Measurement is interrupted.
• Signal outputs and totalizers assume the defined alarm condition.
• A diagnostic message is generated.
Warning
Measurement is resumed. The signal outputs and totalizers are not affected. A diagnostic
message is generated.

Diagnostic information
The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you byproviding information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the
diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display.
Diagnostic information
Diagnostic code
Diagnostic
behavior

Status signal

Diagnostic
numberShort text

↓

↓

↓

842

Process limit

ExampleA0013962

A0013958

NAMUR
NE 1073-digit number

Operating elements
Key

MeaningPlus key
In a menu, submenu
Opens the message about remedy information.
Enter key
In a menu, submenu
Opens the operating menu.

146

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.3.2

Calling up remedial measuresS

XXXXXXXXX

20.50

S801
Supply voltage
i

XX

X

S

XXXXXXXXX

Menu

1.

1

Diagnostic list
Diagnostics 1

S

S801 Supply voltage

Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 3
2.
2
4
6

Supply voltage(ID:203)
S801 0d00h02m25s
Increase supply voltage

35

3.
A0029431-EN

 27

Message about remedial measures

1
2
3
4
5
6

Diagnostic information
Short text
Service ID
Diagnostic behavior with diagnostic code
Operation time of occurrence
Remedial measures

1.

The user is in the diagnostic message.
Press  ( symbol).
 The Diagnostic list submenu opens.

2.

Select the desired diagnostic event with  or  and press  .
 The message about the remedial measures opens.

3.

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The message about the remedial measures closes.

The user is in the Diagnostics menu at an entry for a diagnostics event, e.g. in the
Diagnostic list submenu or Previous diagnostics parameter.
1.

Press .
 The message for the remedial measures for the selected diagnostic event opens.

2.

Press  +  simultaneously.
 The message for the remedial measures closes.

12.4

Diagnostic information in the Web browser

12.4.1

Diagnostic options

Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed in the Web browser on thehome page once the user has logged on.

Endress+Hauser

147

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

1

2

3
A0031056

1
2
3

Status area with status signal
Diagnostic information→  146
Remedy information with Service ID

In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics
menu:• Via parameter• Via submenu →  176
Status signals
The status signals provide information on the state and reliability of the device by
categorizing the cause of the diagnostic information (diagnostic event).
SymbolMeaning
FailureA device error has occurred. The measured value is no longer valid.
Function check
The device is in service mode (e.g. during a simulation).
Out of specification
The device is operated:
Outside its technical specification limits (e.g. outside the process temperature range)
Maintenance required
Maintenance is required. The measured value is still valid.

The status signals are categorized in accordance with VDI/VDE 2650 and NAMUR
Recommendation NE 107.

12.4.2

Calling up remedy information

Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can berectified quickly. These measures are displayed in red along with the diagnostic event andthe related diagnostic information.

12.5

Diagnostic information in FieldCare or DeviceCare

12.5.1

Diagnostic options

Any faults detected by the measuring device are displayed on the home page of theoperating tool once the connection has been established.
148

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

1
Xxxxxx/…/…/
Device name: Xxxxxxx

Mass flow:

12.34

kg/h

Device tag:

Volume flow:

12.34

m³/h

Xxxxxxx

Status signal:

Function check (C)XxxxxxDiagnostics 1:

C485 Simu...

P
P

Remedy information:

Deactivate...

P

Access status tooling:

Mainenance+Operation

+

Setup

+

Diagnostics+

ExpertFailure (F)2Function check (C)Diagnostics 1:

C485 Simulation measured vari...

Remedy information:

Deactivate Simulation (Service...

3

Out of spezification (S)Maintenance required (M)A0021799-EN

1
2
3

Status area with status signal→  145
Diagnostic information→  146
Remedy information with Service ID

In addition, diagnostic events which have occurred can be shown in the Diagnostics
menu:• Via parameter• Via submenu →  176
Diagnostic information
The fault can be identified using the diagnostic information. The short text helps you byproviding information about the fault. In addition, the corresponding symbol for the
diagnostic behavior is displayed in front of the diagnostic information on the local display.
Diagnostic information
Diagnostic code
Diagnostic
behavior

Status signal

Diagnostic
numberShort text

↓

↓

↓

842

Process limit

ExampleA0013962

A0013958

NAMUR
NE 10712.5.23-digit number

Calling up remedy information

Remedy information is provided for every diagnostic event to ensure that problems can berectified quickly:• On the home page
Remedy information is displayed in a separate field below the diagnostics information.
• In the Diagnostics menu
Remedy information can be called up in the working area of the user interface.

Endress+Hauser

149

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

The user is in the Diagnostics menu.
1.

Call up the desired parameter.

2.

On the right in the working area, mouse over the parameter.
 A tool tip with remedy information for the diagnostic event appears.

12.6

Adapting the diagnostic information

12.6.1

Adapting the diagnostic behavior

Each item of diagnostic information is assigned a specific diagnostic behavior at thefactory. The user can change this assignment for specific diagnostic information in the
Diagnostic behavior submenu.
Expert → System → Diagnostic handling → Diagnostic behavior/ ../Diagn. behavior
Diagnostic no.442

0658-1
WarningDiagnostic no.443

A0019179-EN

Available diagnostic behaviors
The following diagnostic behaviors can be assigned:
Diagnostic behavior

Description

Alarm

The device stops measurement. The totalizers assume the defined alarm
condition. A diagnostic message is generated.

Warning

The device continues to measure. The measured value output via PROFIBUS
and the totalizers are not affected. A diagnostic message is generated.

Logbook entry only

The device continues to measure. The diagnostic message is displayed only in
the Event logbook submenu (Event list submenu) and not in alternation withthe operational display.

Off

The diagnostic event is ignored, and no diagnostic message is generated orentered.

Displaying the measured value status
If the Analog Input, Digital Input and Totalizer function blocks are configured for cyclic
data transmission, the device status is coded as per PROFIBUS PA Profile 3.02
Specification and transmitted along with the measured value to the PROFIBUS Master(Class 1) via the coding byte (byte 5). The coding byte is split into three segments: Quality,
Quality Substatus and Limits.

150

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Coding(hex)

Measuring value

Byte 5

Quality

Quality Substatus

Limits
A0032228-EN

 28

Structure of the coding byte

The content of the coding byte depends on the configured failsafe mode in the particularfunction block. Depending on which failsafe mode has been configured, status informationin accordance with PROFIBUS PA Profile Specification 3.02 is transmitted to the PROFIBUS
Master (Class 1) via the coding byte .
Determining the measured value status and device status via the diagnostic behavior
When the diagnostic behavior is assigned, this also changes the measured value status anddevice status for the diagnostic information. The measured value status and device statusdepend on the choice of diagnostic behavior and on the group in which the diagnostic
information is located.
The diagnostic information is grouped as follows:• Diagnostic information pertaining to the sensor: diagnostic number 000 to 199→  151• Diagnostic information pertaining to the electronics: diagnostic number 200 to 399→  152• Diagnostic information pertaining to the configuration: diagnostic number 400 to 599→  152• Diagnostic information pertaining to the process: diagnostic number 800 to 999→  152
Depending on the group in which the diagnostic information is located, the following
measured value status and device status are firmly assigned to the particular diagnostic
behavior:
Diagnostic information pertaining to the sensor: diagnostic number 000 to 199
Diagnostic behavior(configurable)

Device diagnosis(fixed assignment)

Quality

Quality
Substatus

Coding(hex)

Category(NE107)

Alarm

BAD

Maintenancealarm

0x24 to 0x27

F
(Failure)

Maintenancealarm

Warning

GOOD

Maintenancedemanded

0xA8 to 0xAB

M
(Maintenance)

MaintenancedemandedGOOD

ok0x80 to 0x8E––

Logbook entry only
Off

Endress+Hauser

Measured value status (fixed assignment)

151

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostic information pertaining to the electronics: diagnostic number 200 to 399
Diagnostic number 200 to 301, 303 to 399
Diagnostic behavior(configurable)
Alarm
Warning
Logbook entry onlyOff

Measured value status (fixed assignment)

Device diagnosis(fixed assignment)

Quality

Quality
Substatus

Coding(hex)

Category(NE107)BAD

Maintenancealarm

0x24 to 0x27

F
(Failure)

Maintenance
alarm

GOOD

ok

0x80 to 0x8E––

Diagnostic information 302
Measured value status (fixed assignment)

Diagnostic behavior(configurable)

Quality

Quality
Substatus

Coding(hex)

Category(NE107)

Device diagnosis(fixed assignment)

Alarm

BAD

Function check,
local override

0x3C to 0x3F

C

Function check

Warning

GOOD

Function check

0xBC to 0xBF––

Diagnostic information 302 (device verification active) is output during internal orexternal Heartbeat verification.
• Signal status: Function check• Choice of diagnostic behavior: alarm or warning (factory setting)
When Heartbeat verification starts, data logging is interrupted, the last valid measured
value is output and the totalizers are stopped.
Diagnostic information pertaining to the configuration: diagnostic number 400 to 599
Measured value status (fixed assignment)

Diagnostic behavior(configurable)

Quality

Quality
Substatus

Coding(hex)

Category(NE107)

Alarm

BAD

Function
check

0x3C to 0x3F

C
(Check)Function
check

GOOD

Function
check

0xBC to 0xBF–

Function
check

GOOD

ok

0x80 to 0x8E––

Logbook entry only
Off
Logbook entry only
Off

Device diagnosis(fixed assignment)

Diagnostic information pertaining to the process: diagnostic number 800 to 999

Quality

Quality
Substatus

Coding(hex)

Category(NE107)

Alarm

BAD

Process
related0x28 to 0x2B

F
(Failure)

Invalid process
condition

Warning

UNCERTA
IN

Process
related0x78 to 0x7B

S
(Out ofspecification)

Invalid process
condition

GOOD

ok

0x80 to 0x8E––

Logbook entry only
Off

152

Measured value status (fixed assignment)

Diagnostic behavior(configurable)

Device diagnosis(fixed assignment)

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

12.7

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Overview of diagnostic information

The amount of diagnostic information and the number of measured variables affected
increase if the measuring device has one or more application packages.
In the case of some items of diagnostic information, the diagnostic behavior can bechanged. Change the diagnostic information →  150

12.7.1

Diagnostic of sensor

Diagnostic information
No.

Influenced measured
variables

1. Check sensor cable and sensor
2. Execute Heartbeat Verification
3. Replace sensor cable or sensor• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Short text

043 Sensor short circuit
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

Remedy instructions

1)

Quality

Uncertain

Quality substatus

Maintenance demanded

Coding (hex)

0x68 to 0x6B

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

082 Data storage

1. Check module connections
2. Contact service

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

083 Memory content
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Endress+Hauser

1. Restart device
2. Restore HistoROM S-DAT backup('Device reset' parameter)
3. Replace HistoROM S-DAT

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

153

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Check grounding conditions
2. Deactivate conductivity measurement• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Check ambient and process temperature• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

169 Conductivity measurement failed
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Short text

170 Coil resistance
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

180 Temperature sensor defective

1. Check sensor connections
2. Replace sensor cable or sensor
3. Turn off temperature measurement

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Measured variable status

154

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Check sensor cable and sensor
2. Execute Heartbeat Verification
3. Replace sensor cable or sensor• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Short text

181 Sensor connection

Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

12.7.2

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic of electronic

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

201 Device failure

1. Restart device
2. Contact service

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

242 Software incompatible

1. Check software
2. Flash or change main electronics
moduleMeasured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Endress+Hauser• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Check electronic modules
2. Check if correct modules are available(e.g. NEx, Ex)
3. Replace electronic modules• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Short text

252 Modules incompatible

Influenced measured
variables

155

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

252 Modules incompatible

1. Check if correct electronic modul isplugged
2. Replace electronic module

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

262 Sensor electronic connection faulty
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

1. Check or replace connection cablebetween sensor electronic module(ISEM) and main electronics
2. Check or replace ISEM or mainelectronics

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Change main electronic module• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Short text

270 Main electronic failure

156

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Short text

271 Main electronic failure

1. Restart device
2. Change main electronic module

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

272 Main electronic failure

1. Restart device
2. Contact service

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

273 Main electronic failure

Change electronic

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Endress+Hauser

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

157

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Remedy instructions

Short text

275 I/O module 1 to n defective

Change I/O module

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

276 I/O module 1 to n faulty

1. Restart device
2. Change I/O module

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

283 Memory content

1. Reset device
2. Contact service

Measured variable status

158

Remedy instructions

Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

302 Device verification active

Device verification active, please wait.

Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

Influenced measured
variables

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

Warning• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

303 I/O 1 to n configuration changed
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

1. Apply I/O module configuration(parameter 'Apply I/O configuration')
2. Afterwards reload device description
and check wiring

Remedy instructions

Short text

311 Electronic failure

1. Do not reset device
2. Contact service

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

WarningEndress+Hauser–

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

159

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

332 Writing in HistoROM backup failed
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Replace user interface board
Ex d/XP: replace transmitter

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables

1. Restart device
2. Check electronic modules
3. Change I/O Modul or main electronics• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

372 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty

Influenced measured
variables

Remedy instructions

Short text

361 I/O module 1 to n faulty

160

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

1. Restart device
2. Check if failure recurs
3. Replace sensor electronic module(ISEM)• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Transfer data or reset device
2. Contact service• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Restart device
2. Check if failure recurs
3. Replace module rack inclusive electronic
modules• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

373 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

375 I/O- 1 to n communication failed
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Short text

376 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty
Measured variable status [from the factory] 1)

1)Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1. Replace sensor electronic module(ISEM)
2. Turn off diagnostic message• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Endress+Hauser

161

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostic information
No.

Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1. Check sensor cable and sensor
2. Perform Heartbeat Verification
3. Replace sensor cable or sensor• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

382 Data storage

1. Insert T-DAT
2. Replace T-DAT

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Restart device
2. Delete T-DAT via 'Reset device'
parameter
3. Replace T-DAT• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Short text

383 Memory content

162

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

377 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty

1)

Remedy instructions

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

387 HistoROM backup failed

Contact service organization

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

512 Sensor electronic (ISEM) faulty

1. Check ECC recovery time
2. Turn off ECC

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

12.7.3Remedy instructions

Short text

330 Flash file invalid

1. Update firmware of device
2. Restart device

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

WarningEndress+Hauser• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Diagnostic of configuration

Diagnostic information
No.

Influenced measured
variables

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

163

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

331 Firmware update failed

1. Update firmware of device
2. Restart device

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

410 Data transfer

1. Check connection
2. Retry data transfer

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

412 Processing download

Download active, please wait

Measured variable status

164

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Quality

Uncertain

Quality substatus

Initial value

Coding (hex)0x4C to 0x4F

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

431 Trim 1 to n

Carry out trim–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

437 Configuration incompatible

1. Restart device
2. Contact service

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Measured variable status
Quality

Uncertain

Quality substatus

Maintenance demanded

Coding (hex)

0x68 to 0x6B

Status signal

M

Diagnostic behavior

WarningEndress+Hauser• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

1. Check data set file
2. Check device configuration
3. Up- and download new configuration• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Short text

438 Dataset

Influenced measured
variables

165

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

441 Current output 1 to n
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

No.

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1. Check process
2. Check frequency output settings–

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

443 Pulse output 1 to n
Measured variable status [from the factory]

166–

Remedy instructions

442 Frequency output 1 to n

1)

1. Check process
2. Check current output settings

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information

1)

Influenced measured
variables

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1. Check process
2. Check pulse output settings–

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

444 Current input 1 to n
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

Influenced measured
variables

1)

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

1. Check process
2. Check current input settings• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

453 Flow override

Deactivate flow override

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

463 Analog input 1 to n selection invalid
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

1. Check module/channel configuration
2. Check I/O module configuration• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

482 FB not Auto/Cas

Set Block in AUTO mode–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Endress+Hauser

167

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

484 Failure mode simulation

Deactivate simulation

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0x3C to 0x3F

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

485 Measured variable simulation

Deactivate simulation

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

486 Current input 1 to n simulation

Deactivate simulation

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic informationNo.

• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

491 Current output 1 to n simulation

Deactivate simulation–

Measured variable status

168

QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningEndress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostic information
No.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

492 Simulation frequency output 1 to n

Deactivate simulation frequency output–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

493 Simulation pulse output 1 to n

Deactivate simulation pulse output–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

494 Switch output simulation 1 to n

Deactivate simulation switch output–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

495 Diagnostic event simulation

Deactivate simulation–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningEndress+Hauser

169

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

496 Status input simulation

Deactivate simulation status input–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

497 Simulation block output

Deactivate simulation–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Ok

Coding (hex)0x80 to 0x83

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

511 ISEM settings faulty
Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

1. Check measuring period and integration • Conductivity
time• Corrected conductivity
2. Check sensor properties• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

520 I/O 1 to n hardware configuration invalid
Measured variable status

170

Remedy instructions

Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0x3C to 0x3F

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

1. Check I/O hardware configuration
2. Replace wrong I/O module
3. Plug the module of double pulse output
on correct slot–

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

530 Electrode cleaning is running

Turn off ECC

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

531 Empty pipe adjustment faulty

Execute EPD adjustment

Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

Influenced measured
variables

1)

Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

537 Configuration

1. Check IP addresses in network
2. Change IP address

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

WarningDiagnostic information
No.

–

Remedy instructions

Influenced measured
variables

Short text

594 Relay output simulation

Deactivate simulation switch output–

Measured variable status
QualityGood

Quality substatus

Function check

Coding (hex)0xBC to 0xBF

Status signal

C

Diagnostic behavior

WarningEndress+Hauser

171

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.7.4

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostic of process

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

803 Current loop

1. Check wiring
2. Change I/O module

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Process related

Coding (hex)0x28 to 0x2B

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

832 Electronic temperature too highMeasured variable status [from the factory]

1)

Reduce ambient temperature
1)

Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Process related

Coding (hex)0x28 to 0x2B

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

833 Electronic temperature too low

Increase ambient temperature

Measured variable status [from the factory]

172–

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information

1)

Influenced measured
variables

1)

Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Process related

Coding (hex)0x28 to 0x2B

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

834 Process temperature too highReduce process temperature

Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

1)

Quality

Uncertain

Quality substatus

Process related

Coding (hex)0x78 to 0x7B

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

835 Process temperature too low

Increase process temperature

Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

Quality

Uncertain

Quality substatus

Process related

Coding (hex)0x78 to 0x7B

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

842 Process limit
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information

1)

Influenced measured
variables

1)

Quality

Uncertain

Quality substatus

Process related

Coding (hex)0x78 to 0x7B

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

Low flow cut off active!
1. Check low flow cut off configuration

Influenced measured
variables• Flow velocity• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Endress+Hauser

173

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

882 Input signal

1. Check input configuration
2. Check external device or process
conditions

Measured variable status
Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

Diagnostic information
No.

Measured variable status [from the factory] 1)

1)Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

No.

1. Eliminate external magnetic field nearsensor
2. Turn off diagnostic message• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Short text

938 EMC interference
Measured variable status [from the factory]

174

Influenced measured
variables

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information

1)• Corrected conductivity• Measured values 1• Measured values 2• Measured values 3• Density• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Remedy instructions

Short text

937 Sensor symmetry

Influenced measured
variables

1)

Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

F

Diagnostic behavior

Alarm

1. Check ambient conditions regarding
EMC influence
2. Turn off diagnostic message

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Density• Electronic temperature• Empty pipe detection• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Reference density• Corrected volume flow
• Temperature• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

961 Electrode potential out of specification
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

1. Check process conditions
2. Check ambient conditions

1)

Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Maintenance alarm

Coding (hex)0x24 to 0x27

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning• Empty pipe detection• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

Diagnostic information
No.

Remedy instructions

Short text

962 Pipe empty
Measured variable status [from the factory]

1)

Influenced measured
variables

1. Perform full pipe adjustment
2. Perform empty pipe adjustment
3. Turn off empty pipe detection

1)

Quality

Bad

Quality substatus

Process related

Coding (hex)0x28 to 0x2B

Status signal

S

Diagnostic behavior

Warning

Influenced measured
variables• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Flow velocity• Low flow cut off• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Volume flow

Diagnostic behavior can be changed. This causes the overall status of the measured variable to change.

12.8

Pending diagnostic events

The Diagnostics menu allows the user to view the current diagnostic event and theprevious diagnostic event separately.
To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:• Via local display →  147• Via Web browser →  148• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  149• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  149
Other pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list submenu→  176
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu

 Diagnostics

Endress+Hauser

Actual diagnostics→  176

Previous diagnostics→  176

Operating time from restart→  176

Operating time→  176

175

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter
Actual diagnostics

Prerequisite
A diagnostic event has occurred.

Description

User interface

Shows the current occured diagnostic
event along with its diagnostic
information.

Symbol for diagnostic
behavior, diagnostic codeand short message.

two or more messages occur
 Ifsimultaneously,
the message withthe highest priority is shown on
the display.
Previous diagnostics

Two diagnostic events have alreadyoccurred.

Shows the diagnostic event that
occurred prior to the current diagnostic
event along with its diagnostic
information.

Symbol for diagnostic
behavior, diagnostic codeand short message.

Operating time from restart–Shows the time the device has been in
operation since the last device restart.

Days (d), hours (h),minutes (m) and seconds(s)Operating time–

Indicates how long the device has beenin operation.

Days (d), hours (h),minutes (m) and seconds
(s)

12.9

Diagnostic list

Up to 5 currently pending diagnostic events can be displayed in the Diagnostic list
submenu along with the associated diagnostic information. If more than 5 diagnostic
events are pending, the events with the highest priority are shown on the display.
Navigation path
Diagnostics → Diagnostic list
/ ../Diagnose list
Diagnostics
F273 Main electronic
Diagnostics 2
Diagnostics 3
A0014006-EN

 29

Taking the example of the local display

To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:• Via local display →  147• Via Web browser →  148• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  149• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  149

12.10 Event logbook
12.10.1 Reading out the event logbook
A chronological overview of the event messages that have occurred is provided in the
Events list submenu.
Navigation path
Diagnostics menu → Event logbook submenu → Event list

176

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting/ ../Eventlist
F
I1091 Config. change
I1157 Mem.err. ev.list
0d01h19m10s
F311 Electr. failure
A0014008-EN

 30

Taking the example of the local display• A maximum of 20 event messages can be displayed in chronological order.
• If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled in the device,
the event list can contain up to 100 entries .
The event history includes entries for:• Diagnostic events →  153• Information events →  177
In addition to the operation time of its occurrence, each event is also assigned a symbolthat indicates whether the event has occurred or is ended:• Diagnostic event– : Occurrence of the event– : End of the event• Information event
: Occurrence of the event
To call up the measures to rectify a diagnostic event:• Via local display →  147• Via Web browser →  148• Via "FieldCare" operating tool →  149• Via "DeviceCare" operating tool →  149
For filtering the displayed event messages →  177

12.10.2 Filtering the event logbook
Using the Filter options parameter you can define which category of event message isdisplayed in the Events list submenu.
Navigation path
Diagnostics → Event logbook → Filter options
Filter categories• All• Failure (F)• Function check (C)• Out of specification (S)• Maintenance required (M)• Information (I)12.10.3 Overview of information events
Unlike a diagnostic event, an information event is displayed in the event logbook only andnot in the diagnostic list.
Info number

Endress+Hauser

Info name

I1000--------(Device ok)

I1079

Sensor changed

I1089

Power on

I1090

Configuration reset

I1091

Configuration changed

177Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DPInfo number

178

Info name

I1092

HistoROM backup deleted

I1137

Electronic changed

I1151

History reset

I1155

Reset electronic temperature

I1156

Memory error trend

I1157

Memory error event list

I1184

Display connected

I1256

Display: access status changed

I1278

I/O module reset detected

I1335

Firmware changed

I1351

Empty pipe detection adjustment failure

I1353

Empty pipe detection adjustment ok

I1361

Web server: login failed

I1397

Fieldbus: access status changed

I1398

CDI: access status changed

I1443

Coating thickness not determined

I1444

Device verification passed

I1445

Device verification failed

I1457

Measured error verification failed

I1459

I/O module verification failed

I1461

Sensor verification failed

I1462

Sensor electronic module verific. failed

I1512

Download started

I1513

Download finished

I1514

Upload started

I1515

Upload finishedI1618

I/O module 2 replaced

I1619

I/O module 3 replaced

I1621

I/O module 4 replaced

I1622

Calibration changed

I1624

Reset all totalizers

I1625

Write protection activated

I1626

Write protection deactivatedI1627

Web server: login successful

I1628

Display: login successful

I1629

CDI: login successful

I1631

Web server access changed

I1632

Display: login failed

I1633

CDI: login failed

I1634

Reset to factory settings

I1635

Reset to delivery settings

I1636

Fieldbus address reset

I1639

Max. switch cycles number reached

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Info number

Info name

I1649

Hardware write protection activated

I1650

Hardware write protection deactivated

I1712

New flash file received

I1725

Sensor electronic module (ISEM) changed

I1726

Configuration backup failed

12.11 Resetting the measuring device
Using theDevice reset parameter (→  125) it is possible to reset the entire device
configuration or some of the configuration to a defined state.

12.11.1 Function scope of the "Device reset" parameter
Options

Description

CancelNo action is executed and the user exits the parameter.

To delivery settings

Every parameter for which a customer-specific default setting was ordered is resetto this customer-specific value. All other parameters are reset to the factory
setting.

Restart device

The restart resets every parameter whose data are in the volatile memory (RAM)to the factory setting (e.g. measured value data). The device configuration remains
unchanged.

Restore S-DAT backup

Restore the data that are saved on the S-DAT. The data record is restored from theelectronics memory to the S-DAT.

12.12 Device information
The Device information submenu contains all parameters that display different
information for device identification.
Navigation"Diagnostics" menu → Device information‣ Device information

Endress+Hauser

Device tag→  180

Serial number→  180

Firmware version→  180

Device name→  180

Order code→  180

Extended order code 1→  180

Extended order code 2→  180179

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Extended order code 3→  180

ENP version→  180

PROFIBUS ident number→  180

Status PROFIBUS Master Config→  180

Parameter overview with brief description
Parameter

Description

User interface

Factory setting

Device tag

Shows name of measuring point.

Max. 32 characters, such as
letters, numbers or special
characters (e.g. @, %, /).

PromagSerial number

Shows the serial number of the measuring
device.

Max. 11-digit character string
comprising letters andnumbers.

–

Firmware version

Shows the device firmware version installed.

Character string in the format
xx.yy.zz–

Device nameShows the name of the transmitter.

Promag 300/500–

Character string composed ofletters, numbers and certain
punctuation marks (e.g. /).

–Character string–

Character string–

Character string–

name can be found on the The
nameplate of the transmitter.
Order code

Shows the device order code.
order code can be found on the The
nameplate of the sensor andtransmitter in the "Order code" field.

Extended order code 1

Shows the 1st part of the extended order
code.
extended order code can also be Thefound on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.

Extended order code 2

Shows the 2nd part of the extended order
code.
extended order code can also be Thefound on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.

Extended order code 3

Shows the 3rd part of the extended order
code.
extended order code can also be Thefound on the nameplate of the sensor
and transmitter in the "Ext. ord. cd."
field.

ENP version

Shows the version of the electronic
nameplate (ENP).

Character string

2.02.00

PROFIBUS ident number

Displays the PROFIBUS identification
number.

0 to FFFF

0x156C

Status PROFIBUS Master Config

Displays the status of the PROFIBUS Masterconfiguration.

• Active• Not active

Not active

180

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

12.13 Firmware history
Releasedate

Firmwareversion06.2018 01.00.zz

Order codefor"Firmwareversion"Firmware
Changes

Option 75

Original firmware

Documentation
type

OperatingInstructions

Documentation

BA01853D/06/EN/01.18

It is possible to flash the firmware to the current version or the previous version using
the service interface.
For the compatibility of the firmware version with the previous version, the installed
device description files and operating tools, observe the information about the device
in the "Manufacturer's information" document.
The manufacturer's information is available:• In the Download Area of the Endress+Hauser web site: www.endress.com →Downloads• Specify the following details:– Product root: e.g. 5P3B
The product root is the first part of the order code: see the nameplate on thedevice.
– Text search: Manufacturer's information– Media type: Documentation – Technical Documentation

Endress+Hauser

181

Maintenance

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

13

Maintenance

13.1

Maintenance tasks

No special maintenance work is required.

13.1.1

Exterior cleaning

When cleaning the exterior of measuring devices, always use cleaning agents that do notattack the surface of the housing or the seals.

13.1.2

Interior cleaning

No interior cleaning is planned for the device.

13.1.3Replacing seals

The sensor's seals (particularly aseptic molded seals) must be replaced periodically.
The interval between changes depends on the frequency of the cleaning cycles, thecleaning temperature and the medium temperature.
Replacement seals (accessory part) →  213

13.2

Measuring and test equipment

Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of measuring and test equipment, such as W@M or
device tests.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.
List of some of the measuring and testing equipment: →  185

13.3

Endress+Hauser services

Endress+Hauser offers a wide variety of services for maintenance such as recalibration,
maintenance service or device tests.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.

182

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Repairs

14

Repairs

14.1

General notes

14.1.1

Repair and conversion concept

The Endress+Hauser repair and conversion concept provides for the following:• The measuring devices have a modular design.
• Spare parts are grouped into logical kits with the associated Installation Instructions.
• Repairs are carried out by Endress+Hauser Service or by appropriately trained customers.
• Certified devices can only be converted to other certified devices by Endress+Hauser
Service or at the factory.

14.1.2

Notes for repair and conversion

For repair and modification of a measuring device, observe the following notes:‣ Use only original Endress+Hauser spare parts.
‣ Carry out the repair according to the Installation Instructions.
‣ Observe the applicable standards, federal/national regulations, Ex documentation (XA)
and certificates.

‣ Document every repair and each conversion and enter them into the W@M life cycle
management database.

14.2

Spare parts

W@M Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer):
All the spare parts for the measuring device, along with the order code, are listed here andcan be ordered. If available, users can also download the associated Installation
Instructions.
Measuring device serial number:• Is located on the nameplate of the device.
• Can be read out via the Serial number parameter (→  180) in the Device
information submenu.

14.3

Endress+Hauser services

Endress+Hauser offers a wide range of services.
Your Endress+Hauser Sales Center can provide detailed information on the services.

14.4

ReturnThe measuring device must be returned if it is need of repair or a factory calibration, or if
the wrong measuring device has been delivered or ordered. Legal specifications require
Endress+Hauser, as an ISO-certified company, to follow certain procedures when handling
products that are in contact with the medium.
To ensure safe, swift and professional device returns, please refer to the procedure andconditions for returning devices provided on the Endress+Hauser website at
http://www.endress.com/support/return-material

Endress+Hauser

183

Repairs

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

14.5

Disposal

14.5.1

Removing the measuring device

1.

Switch off the device.

LWARNING
Danger to persons from process conditions.
‣ Beware of hazardous process conditions such as pressure in the measuring device, hightemperatures or aggressive fluids.
2.

Carry out the mounting and connection steps from the "Mounting the measuring
device" and "Connecting the measuring device" sections in reverse order. Observe thesafety instructions.

14.5.2

Disposing of the measuring device

LWARNING
Danger to personnel and environment from fluids that are hazardous to health.
‣ Ensure that the measuring device and all cavities are free of fluid residues that arehazardous to health or the environment, e.g. substances that have permeated into
crevices or diffused through plastic.
Observe the following notes during disposal:‣ Observe valid federal/national regulations.
‣ Ensure proper separation and reuse of the device components.

184

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

15

Accessories

Accessories

Various accessories, which can be ordered with the device or subsequently from Endress+Hauser, are available for the device. Detailed information on the order code in question isavailable from your local Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of theEndress+Hauser website: www.endress.com.

15.1

Device-specific accessories

15.1.1For the transmitter

Accessories

Description

Proline 300 transmitter

Transmitter for replacement or storage. Use the order code to define the following
specifications:• Approvals• Output• Input• Display/operation• Housing• Software Order code: 5X3BXX
 Installation Instructions EA01150
Remote display andoperating module
DKX001• If ordered directly with the measuring device:
Order code for "Display; operation", option O "Separate 4-line display, illum.;10 m (30 ft)Cable; touch control".
• If ordered separately:– Measuring device: order code for "Display; operation", option M "None,
prepared for separate display".
– DKX001: Via the separate product structure DKX001.
• If ordered subsequently:
DKX001: Via the separate product structure DKX001.
Mounting bracket for DKX001• Ordered directly with the DKX001:
Order code for "Enclosed accessories", option RA "Mounting bracket, 1"/2" pipe".
• If ordered subsequently: order number: 71340960
Connecting cable (replacement cable)
Via the separate product structure: DKX002

 Further information on display and operating module DKX001→  207.
 Special Documentation SD01763D
External WLAN antenna

External WLAN antenna with 1.5 m (59.1 in) connecting cable and two angle
brackets. Order code for "Enclosed accessories", option P8 "Wireless antenna widearea".
The external WLAN antenna is not suitable for use in hygienic • applications.
• Further information on the WLAN interface →  71.

 Order number: 71351317
 Installation Instructions EA01238D
Protective cover

Is used to protect the measuring device from the effects of the weather: e.g.
rainwater, excess heating from direct sunlight.

 Order number: 71343505
 Installation Instructions EA01160
Ground cableEndress+Hauser

Set, consisting of two ground cables for potential equalization.

185

Accessories

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

15.1.2For the sensor

Accessories

Description

Ground disks

Are used to ground the medium in lined measuring tubes to ensure proper
measurement.

 For details, see Installation Instructions EA00070D
15.2

Service-specific accessories

Accessories

Description

Applicator

Software for selecting and sizing Endress+Hauser measuring devices:• Choice of measuring devices for industrial requirements• Calculation of all the necessary data for identifying the optimum flowmeter: e.g.
nominal diameter, pressure loss, flow velocity and accuracy.
• Graphic illustration of the calculation results• Determination of the partial order code, administration, documentation andaccess to all project-related data and parameters over the entire life cycle of a
project.
Applicator is available:• Via the Internet: https://portal.endress.com/webapp/applicator• As a downloadable DVD for local PC installation.

W@M

W@M Life Cycle Management
Improved productivity with information at your fingertips. Data relevant to a plantand its components is generated from the first stages of planning and during theasset’s complete life cycle.
W@M Life Cycle Management is an open and flexible information platform with
online and on-site tools. Instant access for your staff to current, in-depth data
shortens your plant’s engineering time, speeds up procurement processes andincreases plant uptime.
Combined with the right services, W@M Life Cycle Management boosts
productivity in every phase. For more information, visit
www.endress.com/lifecyclemanagement

FieldCare

FDT-based plant asset management tool from Endress+Hauser.
It can configure all smart field units in your system and helps you manage them. By
using the status information, it is also a simple but effective way of checking theirstatus and condition.

 Operating Instructions BA00027S and BA00059S
DeviceCare

Tool to connect and configure Endress+Hauser field devices.

 Innovation brochure IN01047S
15.3

System components

Accessories

Description

Memograph M graphic
data manager

The Memograph M graphic data manager provides information on all the relevantmeasured variables. Measured values are recorded correctly, limit values aremonitored and measuring points analyzed. The data are stored in the 256 MB
internal memory and also on a SD card or USB stick.
Information TI00133R
 •• Technical
Operating Instructions BA00247R

186

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Technical data

16

Technical data

16.1

Application

The measuring device is only suitable for flow measurement of liquids with a minimum
conductivity of 5 µS/cm.
Depending on the version ordered, the measuring device can also measure potentiallyexplosive, flammable, poisonous and oxidizing media.
To ensure that the device remains in proper operating condition for its service life, use themeasuring device only for media against which the process-wetted materials are
sufficiently resistant.

16.2

Function and system design

Measuring principle

Electromagnetic flow measurement on the basis of Faraday's law of magnetic induction.

Measuring system

The device consists of a transmitter and a sensor.
The device is available as a compact version:
The transmitter and sensor form a mechanical unit.
For information on the structure of the device →  14

16.3
Measured variable

Input

Direct measured variables• Volume flow (proportional to induced voltage)• Electrical conductivity
Calculated measured variables• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow

Measuring range

Typically v = 0.01 to 10 m/s (0.03 to 33 ft/s) with the specified accuracy
Flow characteristic values in SI units: DN 15 to 125 (½ to 4")
NominaldiameterEndress+Hauser

Recommended
flow

Factory settingsmin./max. full scale value(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s)

Full scale value current
output(v ~ 2.5 m/s)

Pulse value Low flow cut off(~ 2 pulse/s) (v ~ 0.04 m/s)

[mm]

[in]

[dm3/min][dm3/min][dm3][dm3/min]15½

4 to 100

25

0.2

0.5

25

1

9 to 300

75

0.5

1

32

–

15 to 500

125

1

2

40

1½

25 to 700

200

1.5

3

50

2

35 to 1 100

300

2.5

5

65

–

60 to 2 000

500

5

8

187

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Nominaldiameter

Recommended
flow

Factory settingsmin./max. full scale value(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s)

Full scale value current
output(v ~ 2.5 m/s)

Pulse value Low flow cut off(~ 2 pulse/s) (v ~ 0.04 m/s)

[mm]

[in]

[dm3/min][dm3/min][dm3][dm3/min]80

3

90 to 3 000

750

5

12

100

4

145 to 4 700

1200

10

20

125

–

220 to 7 500

1850

15

30

Flow characteristic values in SI units: DN 150 to 600 (6 to 24")
Nominaldiameter

Recommended
flow

Factory settingsmin./max. full scale value(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s)

Full scale value current
output(v ~ 2.5 m/s)

Pulse value Low flow cut off(~ 2 pulse/s) (v ~ 0.04 m/s)

[mm]

[in]

[m3/h][m3/h][m3][m3/h]

150

6

20 to 600

150

0.03

2.5

200

8

35 to 1 100

300

0.05

5

250

10

55 to 1 700

500

0.05

7.5

300

12

80 to 2 400

750

0.1

10

350

14

110 to 3 300

1 000

0.1

15

400

16

140 to 4 200

1 200

0.15

20

450

18

180 to 5 400

1 500

0.25

25

500

20

220 to 6 600

2 000

0.25

30

600

24

310 to 9 600

2 500

0.3

40

Flow characteristic values in US units
Nominaldiameter

188

Recommended
flow

Factory settingsmin./max. full scale value(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s)

Full scale value current
output(v ~ 2.5 m/s)

Pulse value Low flow cut off(~ 2 pulse/s) (v ~ 0.04 m/s)

[in]

[mm]

[gal/min][gal/min][gal][gal/min]½

15

1.0 to 27

6

0.1

0.15

1

25

2.5 to 80

18

0.2

0.25

1½

40

7 to 190

50

0.5

0.75

2

50

10 to 300

75

0.5

1.25

3

80

24 to 800

200

2

2.5

4

100

40 to 1 250

300

2

4

6

150

90 to 2 650

600

5

12

8

200

155 to 4 850

1200

10

15

10

250

250 to 7 500

1500

15

30

12

300

350 to 10 600

2400

25

45

14

350

500 to 15 000

3600

30

60

16

400

600 to 19 000

4800

50

60

18

450

800 to 24 000

6000

50

90

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Technical data

Nominaldiameter

Recommended
flow

Factory settingsmin./max. full scale value(v ~ 0.3/10 m/s)

Full scale value current
output(v ~ 2.5 m/s)

Pulse value Low flow cut off(~ 2 pulse/s) (v ~ 0.04 m/s)

[in]

[mm]

[gal/min][gal/min][gal][gal/min]

20500

1 000 to 30 000

7500

75

120

24

600

1 400 to 44 000

10500

100

180

Recommended measuring range"Flow limit" section →  201
Operable flow range

Over 1000 : 1

Input signal

External measured values
To increase the accuracy of certain measured variables or to calculate the corrected volume
flow, the automation system can continuously write different measured values to themeasuring device:• Medium temperature to increase the accuracy of the electrical conductivity (e.g. iTEMP)• Reference density for calculating the corrected volume flow
Various pressure transmitters and temperature measuring devices can be orderedfrom Endress+Hauser: see "Accessories" section →  186
It is recommended to read in external measured values to calculate the corrected volume
flow.
Current input
The measured values are written from the automation system to the measuring device via
the current input →  189.
Digital communication
The measured values are written from the automation system to the measuring device via
PROFIBUS DP.
Current input 0/4 to 20 mA

Endress+Hauser

Current input

0/4 to 20 mA (active/passive)

Current span

• 4 to 20 mA (active)• 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)

Resolution

1 µA

Voltage drop

Typically: 0.6 to 2 V for 3.6 to 22 mA (passive)

Maximum input voltage≤ 30 V (passive)

Open-circuit voltage≤ 28.8 V (active)

Possible input variables• Pressure• Temperature• Density

189Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Status input

190

Maximum input values• DC –3 to 30 V
• If status input is active (ON): Ri >3 kΩ

Response time

Adjustable: 5 to 200 ms

Input signal level• Low signal: DC –3 to +5 V
• High signal: DC 12 to 30 V

Assignable functions• Off• Reset the individual totalizers separately• Reset all totalizers• Flow override

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

16.4
Output signal

Technical data

OutputPROFIBUS DP
Signal encoding

NRZ code

Data transfer

9.6 kBaud…12 MBaud

Current output 0/4 to 20 mA
Current output

0/4 to 20 mA

Maximum output values

22.5 mA

Current span

Can be set to:• 4 to 20 mA (active)• 0/4 to 20 mA (passive) Ex-i, passive
Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Maximum input voltage

DC 30 V (passive)

Load

0 to 700 Ω

Resolution

0.38 µA

Damping

Adjustable: 0.07 to 999 s

Assignable measured
variables• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Temperature• Electronic temperature

Pulse/frequency/switch output
FunctionCan be set to pulse, frequency or switch output

VersionOpen collector
Can be set to:• Active• Passive Ex-i, passive
Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Voltage drop

For 22.5 mA: ≤ DC 2 V

Pulse output

Endress+Hauser

Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Maximum output current

22.5 mA (active)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Pulse width

Adjustable: 0.05 to 2 000 ms

Maximum pulse rate

10 000 Impulse/s

Pulse value

Adjustable

191

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Assignable measured
variables• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow

Frequency output
Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Maximum output current

22.5 mA (active)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Output frequency

Adjustable: end value frequency 2 to 10 000 Hz (f max = 12 500 Hz)

Damping

Adjustable: 0 to 999 s

Pulse/pause ratio

1:1

Assignable measured
variables• Volume flow
• Mass flow
• Corrected volume flow
• Flow velocity• Conductivity• Corrected conductivity• Temperature• Electronic temperature

Switch output
Maximum input values

DC 30 V, 250 mA (passive)

Open-circuit voltage

DC 28.8 V (active)

Switching behavior

Binary, conductive or non-conductive

Switching delay

Adjustable: 0 to 100 s

Number of switchingcyclesUnlimited

Assignable functions

• Off
• On
• Diagnostic behavior• Limit value:– Off– Volume flow
– Mass flow
– Corrected volume flow
– Flow velocity– Conductivity– Corrected conductivity– Totalizer 1-3– Temperature– Electronic temperature• Flow direction monitoring• Status– Empty pipe detection– Low flow

Relay output

192

Function

Switch output

Version

Relay output, galvanically isolated

Switching behavior

Can be set to:• NO (normally open), factory setting• NC (normally closed)

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Technical data

Maximum switchingcapacity (passive)• DC 30 V, 0.1 A• AC 30 V, 0.5 A

Assignable functions

• Off
• On
• Diagnostic behavior• Limit value:– Off– Volume flow
– Mass flow
– Corrected volume flow
– Flow velocity– Conductivity– Corrected conductivity– Totalizer 1-3– Temperature– Electronic temperature• Flow direction monitoring• Status– Empty pipe detection– Low flow

User configurable input/output
One specific input or output is assigned to a user-configurable input/output (configurableI/O) during device commissioning.
The following inputs and outputs are available for assignment:• Choice of current output: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)• Pulse/frequency/switch output• Choice of current input: 4 to 20 mA (active), 0/4 to 20 mA (passive)• Status input
The technical values correspond to those of the inputs and outputs described in thissection.
Signal on alarm

Depending on the interface, failure information is displayed as follows:
PROFIBUS DP
Status and alarm
messages

Diagnostics in accordance with PROFIBUS PA Profile 3.02

Current output 0/4 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
Failure mode

Choose from:• 4 to 20 mA in accordance with NAMUR recommendation NE 43• 4 to 20 mA in accordance with US• Min. value: 3.59 mA• Max. value: 22.5 mA• Freely definable value between: 3.59 to 22.5 mA• Actual value• Last valid value

0 to 20 mA
Failure modeEndress+Hauser

Choose from:• Maximum alarm: 22 mA• Freely definable value between: 0 to 20.5 mA

193

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Pulse/frequency/switch output
Pulse output
Failure mode

Choose from:• Actual value• No pulses

Frequency output
Failure mode

Choose from:• Actual value• 0 Hz• Defined value (f max 2 to 12 500 Hz)

Switch output
Failure mode

Choose from:• Current status• Open• Closed

Relay output
Failure mode

Choose from:• Current status• Open• Closed

Local display
Plain text display

With information on cause and remedial measures

Backlight

Red backlighting indicates a device error.

Status signal as per NAMUR recommendation NE 107
Interface/protocol• Via digital communication:
PROFIBUS DP• Via service interface– CDI-RJ45 service interface– WLAN interface
Plain text display

With information on cause and remedial measures

Web server
Plain text display

With information on cause and remedial measures

Light emitting diodes (LED)
Status information

Status indicated by various light emitting diodes
The following information is displayed depending on the device version:• Supply voltage active• Data transmission active• Device alarm/error has occurred Diagnostic information via light emitting diodes
194

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Technical data

Low flow cut off

The switch points for low flow cut off are user-selectable.

Galvanic isolation

The outputs are galvanically isolated from one another and from earth (PE).

Protocol-specific data

Manufacturer ID

0x11

Ident number

0x1570

Profile version

3.02

Device description files (GSD,
DTM, DD)

Information and files under:• www.endress.com
On the product page for the device: Documents/Software → Device drivers• www.profibus.org

Supported functions• Identification & Maintenance
Simplest device identification on the part of the control system andnameplate• PROFIBUS upload/download
Reading and writing parameters is up to ten times faster with PROFIBUS
upload/download• Condensed status
Simplest and self-explanatory diagnostic information by categorizing
diagnostic messages that occur

Configuration of the device
address• DIP switches on the I/O electronics module• Via operating tools (e.g. FieldCare)

System integration

Information regarding system integration .
• Cyclic data transmission• Block model• Description of the modules

16.5

Power supply

Terminal assignment→  36

Supply voltage

Order code for"Power supply"

terminal voltage

Option D

DC24 V±20%–

Option E

AC100 to 240 V–15…+10%50/60 Hz, ±4 Hz

DC24 V±20%–

AC100 to 240 V–15…+10%50/60 Hz, ±4 Hz

Option I

Power consumption

Frequency range

TransmitterMax. 10 W (active power)

Current consumption

Transmitter• Max. 400 mA (24 V)• Max. 200 mA (110 V, 50/60 Hz; 230 V, 50/60 Hz)

Power supply failure

Endress+Hauser

Depending on the device version, the configuration is retained in the device memoryor in
the pluggable data memory (HistoROM DAT).

195

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Electrical connection→  37

Potential equalization→  41terminals

Spring-loaded terminals: Suitable for strands and strands with ferrules.
Conductor cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (24 to 12 AWG).

Cable entries• Cable gland: M20 × 1.5 with cable ⌀ 6 to 12 mm (0.24 to 0.47 in)• Thread for cable entry:– NPT ½"
– G ½"– M20• Device plug for digital communication: M12

Cable specification→  33

16.6

Performance characteristics

Reference operating
conditions• Error limits following DIN EN 29104, in future ISO 20456• Water, typically: +15 to +45 °C (+59 to +113 °F); 0.5 to 7 bar (73 to 101 psi)
• Data as indicated in the calibration protocol• Accuracy based on accredited calibration rigs according to ISO 17025

Maximum measured error

Error limits under reference operating conditions
o.r. = of reading
Volume flow
• ±0.5 % o.r. ± 1 mm/s (0.04 in/s)• Optional: ±0.2 % o.r. ± 2 mm/s (0.08 in/s)
Fluctuations in the supply voltage do not have any effect within the specified range.

[%]
2.5
2.0

0.5 %

1.5

0.2 %

1.0
0.5
0
0

0

1

2

5

4

10

6

15

20

8

25

30

10 [m/s]v
32 [ft/s]
A0028974 31

Maximum measured error in % o.r.

Electrical conductivity
Max. measured error not specified.

196

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Technical data

Accuracy of outputs
The outputs have the following base accuracy specifications.
Current output
Accuracy±5 µA

Pulse/frequency output
o.r. = of reading
Accuracy

Repeatability

Max. ±50 ppm o.r. (over the entire ambient temperature range)o.r. = of reading
Volume flow
Max. ±0.1 % o.r. ± 0.5 mm/s (0.02 in/s)
Electrical conductivity
Max. ±5 % o.r.

Influence of ambient
temperature

Current output
Temperature coefficientMax. 1 μA/°C

Pulse/frequency output
Temperature coefficient

16.7

No additional effect. Included in accuracy.

Installation"Mounting requirements" →  21

16.8
Ambient temperature
range

Environment→  23Temperature tables
Observe the interdependencies between the permitted ambient and fluid
temperatures when operating the device in hazardous areas.
For detailed information on the temperature tables, see the separate document
entitled "Safety Instructions" (XA) for the device.

Storage temperature

The storage temperature corresponds to the operating temperature range of thetransmitter and the sensor →  23.
• Protect the measuring device against direct sunlight during storage in order to avoid
unacceptably high surface temperatures.
• Select a storage location where moisture cannot collect in the measuring device as
fungus or bacteria infestation can damage the liner.
• If protection caps or protective covers are mounted these should never be removed
before installing the measuring device.

Endress+Hauser

197

Technical data

Degree of protection

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Measuring device• As standard: IP66/67, type 4X enclosure• When housing is open: IP20, type 1 enclosure• Display module: IP20, type 1 enclosure
External WLAN antenna
IP67

Vibration resistance• Oscillation, sinusoidal, following IEC 60068-2-6– 2 to 8.4 Hz, 3.5 mm peak
– 8.4 to 2 000 Hz, 1 g peak
• Oscillation, broadband noise following IEC 60068-2-64– 10 to 200 Hz, 0.003 g2/Hz– 200 to 2 000 Hz, 0.001 g2/Hz– Total: 1.54 g rms

Shock resistance

Shock, half-sine according to IEC 60068-2-27
6 ms 50 g

Shock resistance

Shock due to rough handling following IEC 60068-2-31

Mechanical load

• Protect the transmitter housing against mechanical effects, such as shock or impact.
• Never use the transmitter housing as a ladder or climbing aid.

Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)• As per IEC/EN 61326 and NAMUR Recommendation 21 (NE 21)• Device version with PROFIBUS DP: Complies with emission limits for industry as per EN
50170 Volume 2, IEC 61784
The following applies for PROFIBUS DP: If baud rates > 1.5 MBaud, an EMC cableentry must be used and the cable shield must continue as far as the terminal wherever
possible.
Details are provided in the Declaration of Conformity.

16.9
Medium temperature range

198

Process• –20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F) for PFA, DN 25 to 200 (1 to 8")• –20 to +180 °C (–4 to +356 °F) for PFA high-temperature, DN 25 to 200 (1 to 8")• –40 to +130 °C (–40 to +266 °F) for PTFE, DN 15 to 600 (½ to 24")

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Technical data

1TA[°F] [°C]
140 60
100

2

3

4

40
20
0

0

-20

-40

-40
-40 -20 0-40

020 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 [°C]
TF
100
200
300 360 [°F]A0035803

 32
TA
TF
1
2
3
4

PFA

Ambient temperature range
Fluid temperature
Colored area: the ambient temperature range –10 to –20 °C (+14 to –4 °F) applies to stainless flanges only
Hatched area: harsh environment only for fluid temperature range –20 to +130 °C (–4 to +266 °F)–20 to +150 °C (–4 to +302 °F) for PFA, DN 25 to 200 (1 to 8")–20 to +180 °C (–4 to +356 °F) for PFA high-temperature, DN 25 to 200 (1 to 8")1TA[°F] [°C]
140 60
100

40
20
0

0

-20

-40

-40
-40 -20 0-40

020 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 [°C]
TF
100
200
300 360 [°F]A0029808

 33
TA
TF
1

Conductivity

Endress+Hauser

PTFE

Ambient temperature range
Fluid temperature
Colored area: the ambient temperature range of –10 to –40 °C (+14 to –40 °F) applies to stainless flanges
only≥ 5 μS/cm for liquids in general. Stronger filter damping is required for very low
conductivity values.

199

Technical data

Pressure-temperature
ratings
Pressure tightness

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

An overview of the pressure-temperature ratings for the process connections isprovided in the "Technical Information" document"–" = no specifications possible
Liner: PFA
Nominal diameter

Limit values for absolute pressure in [mbar] ([psi]) for medium temperatures:

[mm]

[in]

+25 °C (+77 °F)+80 °C (+176 °F)+100 to +180 °C(+212 to +356 °F)

25

1

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

32

–

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

40

1½

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

50

2

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

65

–

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

80

3

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100

4

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

125

–

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

150

6

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

200

8

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

Liner: PTFE

200

Nominal diameter

Limit values for absolute pressure in [mbar] ([psi]) for medium temperatures:

[mm]

[in]

+25 °C (+77 °F)+80 °C (+176 °F)+100 °C (+212 °F)+130 °C (+266 °F)

15

½

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100 (1.45)

25

1

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100 (1.45)

32

–

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100 (1.45)

40

1½

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100 (1.45)

50

2

0 (0)

0 (0)

0 (0)

100 (1.45)

65

–

0 (0)

–

40 (0.58)

130 (1.89)

80

3

0 (0)

–

40 (0.58)

130 (1.89)

100

4

0 (0)

–

135 (1.96)

170 (2.47)

125–

135 (1.96)–

240 (3.48)

385 (5.58)150

6135 (1.96)–

240 (3.48)

385 (5.58)200

8200 (2.90)–

290 (4.21)

410 (5.95)

250

10

330 (4.79)–

400 (5.80)

530 (7.69)

300

12

400 (5.80)–

500 (7.25)

630 (9.14)

350

14

470 (6.82)–

600 (8.70)

730 (10.6)

400

16

540 (7.83)–

670 (9.72)

800 (11.6)

450

18

500

20

600

24

No negative pressure permitted!

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Flow limit

Technical data

The diameter of the pipe and the flow rate determine the nominal diameter of the sensor.
The optimum velocity of flow is between 2 to 3 m/s (6.56 to 9.84 ft/s). Also match thevelocity of flow (v) to the physical properties of the fluid:• v < 2 m/s (6.56 ft/s): for abrasive fluids (e.g. potter's clay, lime milk, ore slurry)• v > 2 m/s (6.56 ft/s): for fluids producing buildup (e.g. wastewater sludge)
A necessary increase in the flow velocity can be achieved by reducing the sensor
nominal diameter.
For an overview of the full scale values for the measuring range, see the "Measuring
range" section →  187

Pressure loss

• No pressure loss occurs if the sensor is installed in a pipe with the same nominal
diameter.
• Pressure losses for configurations incorporating adapters according to DIN EN 545→  25[psi] [mbar]
7 500
6

DN50
(2")

450
400

5

350

4

300

DN65
(2½")
DN80
(3")

250
3
2
1
0

200
150
100
50
0

30

40

50

60

70

80

90 100 110 120 [m³/h]

0

10

20

0

50

100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500[gal/min]
A0032667-EN

 34

Endress+Hauser

Pressure loss DN 50 to 80 (2 to 3") in the case of order code for "Design", option C "Insertion length short
ISO/DVGW to DN300, without inlet/outlet runs, constricted meas.tube"

201

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP[psi][mbar]
13 900
12
800
11
DN125
10 700
(5")
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

DN150
(6")

DN250
(10")

DN200
(8")

600 DN100
(4")
500

DN300
(12")

400
300
200
100
0

400

600

800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 [m³/h]

0

200

0

1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 [gal/min]
A0032668-EN

 35

Pressure loss DN 100 to 300 (4 to 12") in the case of order code for "Design", option C "Insertion length
short ISO/DVGW to DN300, without inlet/outlet runs, constricted meas.tube"

System pressure→  24

Vibrations→  2416.10 Mechanical construction
Design, dimensions

Weight

For the dimensions and installation lengths of the device, see the "Technical
Information" document, "Mechanical construction" section.
All values (weight exclusive of packaging material) refer to devices for standard pressure
ratings. Weight specifications including transmitter as per order code for "Housing", option
A "Aluminum, coated".
Different values due to different transmitter versions:
Transmitter version for the hazardous area
(Order code for "Housing", option A "Aluminum, coated"; Ex d): +2 kg (+4.4 lbs)
Weight in SI units
Nominal diameter202

EN (DIN), AS 1)

ASME

JIS

[mm]

[in]

Pressure rating[kg]

Pressure rating[kg]

Pressure rating

[kg]

15

½

PN 40

7.2

Class 150

7.2

10K

4.5

25

1

PN 40

8.0

Class 150

8.0

10K

5.3

32

–

PN 40

8.7

Class 150

–

10K

5.3

40

1½

PN 40

10.1

Class 150

10.1

10K

6.3

50

2

PN 40

11.3

Class 150

11.3

10K

7.3

65

–

PN 16

12.7

Class 150

–

10K

9.1

80

3

PN 16

14.7

Class 150

14.7

10K

10.5

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Technical data

EN (DIN), AS 1)

Nominal diameter

ASME

JIS

[mm]

[in]

Pressure rating[kg]

Pressure rating[kg]

Pressure rating

[kg]

100

4

PN 16

16.7

Class 150

16.7

10K

12.7

125

–

PN 16

22.2

Class 150

–

10K

19

150

6

PN 16

26.2

Class 150

26.2

10K

22.5

200

8

PN 10

45.7

Class 150

45.7

10K

39.9

250

10

PN 10

65.7

Class 150

75.7

10K

67.4

300

12

PN 10

70.7

Class 150

111

10K

70.3

350

14

PN 10

105.7

Class 150

176

10K

79

400

16

PN 10

120.7

Class 150

206

10K

100

450

18

PN 10

161.7

Class 150

256

10K

128

500

20

PN 10

156.7

Class 150

286

10K

142

600

24

PN 10

208.7

Class 150

406

10K

188

1)

For flanges to AS, only DN 25 and 50 are available.

Weight in US units
Nominal diameter

Measuring tube
specification

Endress+Hauser

ASME

[mm]

[in]

Pressure rating

[lbs]

15

½

Class 150

15.9

25

1

Class 150

17.6

40

1½

Class 150

22.3

50

2

Class 150

24.9

80

3

Class 150

32.4

100

4

Class 150

36.8

150

6

Class 150

57.7

200

8

Class 150

101

250

10

Class 150

167

300

12

Class 150

244

350

14

Class 150

387

400

16

Class 150

454

450

18

Class 150

564

500

20

Class 150

630

600

24

Class 150

895

NominaldiameterPressure rating
EN
(DIN)

ASME

Process connection internal diameter

AS 2129 AS 4087

JIS

PFA

PTFE

[mm]

[in]

[bar]

[psi]

[bar]

[bar]

[bar]

[mm]

[in]

[mm]

[in]

15

½

PN 40

Class 150

–

–

20K

–

–

15

0.59

25

1

PN 40

Class 150

Table E

–

20K

23

0.91

26

1.02

32

–

PN 40

–

–

–

20K

32

1.26

35

1.38

40

1½

PN 40

Class 150

–

–

20K

36

1.42

41

1.61

203

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

NominaldiameterMaterials

Pressure rating
EN
(DIN)

ASME

Process connection internal diameter

AS 2129 AS 4087

JIS

PFA

PTFE

[mm]

[in]

[bar]

[psi]

[bar]

[bar]

[bar]

[mm]

[in]

[mm]

[in]

50

2

PN 40

Class 150

Table E

PN 16

10K

48

1.89

52

2.05

65

–

PN 16

–

–

–

10K

63

2.48

67

2.64

80

3

PN 16

Class 150

–

–

10K

75

2.95

80

3.15

100

4

PN 16

Class 150

–

–

10K

101

3.98

104

4.09

125

–

PN 16

–

–

–

10K

126

4.96

129

5.08

150

6

PN 16

Class 150

–

–

10K

154

6.06

156

6.14

200

8

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

201

7.91

202

7.95

250

10

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

–

–

256

10.1

300

12

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

–

–

306

12.0

350

14

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

–

–

337

13.3

400

16

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

–

–

387

15.2

450

18

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

–

–

432

17.0

500

20

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

–

–

487

19.2

600

24

PN 10

Class 150

–

–

10K

–

–

593

23.3

Transmitter housing
Order code for "Housing":
Option A "Aluminum, coated": aluminum, AlSi10Mg, coated
Window material
Order code for "Housing":
Option A "Aluminum, coated": glass
Cable entries/cable glands

1

2
3
A0020640

 36
1
2
3

204

Possible cable entries/cable glands

Female thread M20 × 1.5
Cable gland M20 × 1.5
Adapter for cable entry with internal thread G ½" or NPT ½"

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Technical data

Order code for "Housing", option A "Aluminum, coated"
The various cable entries are suitable for hazardous and non-hazardous areas.
Cable entry/cable glandMaterial

Cable gland M20 × 1.5

Plastic/nickel-plated brass

Adapter for cable entry with internal thread G ½"

Nickel-plated brass

Adapter for cable entry with internal thread NPT ½"
Device plug

Plug M12 × 1• Socket: Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L)• Contact housing: Polyamide• Contacts: Gold-plated brass

Sensor housing• DN 15 to 300 (½ to 12"): coated aluminum AlSi10Mg• DN 350 to 600 (14 to 24"): carbon steel with protective varnish
Measuring tubes
Stainless steel, 1.4301/304/1.4306/304L
For flanges made of carbon with Al/Zn protective coating (DN 15 to 300 (½ to 12")) or
protective varnish (DN 350 to 600 (14 to 24"))
Liner
• PFA
• PTFE
Process connections
EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
Stainless steel, 1.4571 (F316L); carbon steel, E250C 1)/S235JRG2/P245GH
ASME B16.5
Stainless steel, F316L; carbon steel, A105 1)
JIS B2220
Stainless steel, 1.0425 (F316L) 1); carbon steel, A105/A350 LF2
AS 2129 Table E• DN 25 (1"): carbon steel, A105/S235JRG2• DN 40 (1 ½"): carbon steel, A105/S275JR
AS 4087 PN 16
Carbon steel, A105/S275JRElectrodes
Stainless steel, 1.4435 (F316L); Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022); platinum; tantalum;
titaniumSeals
As per DIN EN 1514-1, form IBC
Accessories
Protective cover
Stainless steel, 1.4404 (316L)
1)

DN 15 to 300 (½ to 12") with Al/Zn protective coating; DN 350 to 600 (14 to 24") with protective varnish

Endress+Hauser

205

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

External WLAN antenna• Antenna: ASA plastic (acrylic ester-styrene-acrylonitrile) and nickel-plated brass• Adapter: Stainless steel and nickel-plated brass• Cable: Polyethylene• Plug: Nickel-plated brass• Angle bracket: Stainless steel
Ground disks
Stainless steel, 1.4435 (F316L); Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022); tantalum; titanium
Fitted electrodes

Measuring electrodes, reference electrodes and electrodes for empty pipe detection:• Standard: stainless steel, 1.4435 (F316L); Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022); tantalum,
titanium• Optional: only platinum measuring electrodes

Surface roughness

Stainless steel electrodes, 1.4435 (F316L); Alloy C22, 2.4602 (UNS N06022); platinum;
tantalum; titanium:≤ 0.3 to 0.5 µm (11.8 to 19.7 µin)
(All data relate to parts in contact with fluid)
Liner with PFA:
≤ 0.4 µm (15.7 µin)
(All data relate to parts in contact with fluid)

16.11 Operability
Languages

Can be operated in the following languages:• Via local operation
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish,
Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Bahasa (Indonesian), Vietnamese, Czech, Swedish• Via Web browser
English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Russian, Turkish,
Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Bahasa (Indonesian), Vietnamese, Czech, Swedish• Via "FieldCare", "DeviceCare" operating tool: English, German, French, Spanish, Italian,
Chinese, Japanese

Local operation

Via display module
Two display modules are available:• Order code for "Display; operation", option F "4-line, illuminated, graphic display; touch
control"• Order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated, graphic display; touch
control + WLAN"
Information about WLAN interface →  71

A0026785

 37

206

Operation with touch control

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Technical data

Display elements• 4-line, illuminated, graphic display• White background lighting; switches to red in event of device errors• Format for displaying measured variables and status variables can be individuallyconfigured• Permitted ambient temperature for the display: –20 to +60 °C (–4 to +140 °F)
The readability of the display may be impaired at temperatures outside the temperature
range.
Operating elements• External operation via touch control (3 optical keys) without opening the housing: ,, • Operating elements also accessible in the various zones of the hazardous area
Via remote display and operating module DKX001
The remote display and operating module DKX001 is available as an optional extra→  185.
• The measuring device is always supplied with a dummy cover when the remote
display and operating module DKX001 is ordered directly with the measuring
device. Display or operation at the transmitter is not possible in this case.
• If ordered subsequently, the remote display and operating module DKX001 may not
be connected at the same time as the existing measuring device display module.
Only one display or operation unit may be connected to the transmitter at any onetime.

A0026786 38

Operation via remote display and operating module DKX001

Display and operating elements
The display and operating elements correspond to those of the display module →  206.
Material
The housing material of the display and operating module DKX001 depends on the choiceof transmitter housing material.
Transmitter housing

Remote display and operating module

Order code for "Housing"Material

Material

Option A "Aluminum, coated"

AlSi10Mg, coated

AlSi10Mg, coated

Cable entry
Corresponds to the choice of transmitter housing, order code for "Electrical connection".

Endress+Hauser

207

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Connecting cable→  34
Dimensions
Information on the dimensions:"Mechanical construction" section of the "Technical Information" document.
Remote operation→  70Service interface→  70Supported operating tools

Different operating tools can be used for local or remote access to the measuring device.
Depending on the operating tool used, access is possible with different operating units andvia a variety of interfaces.
Supported operating
tools

Operating unit

Interface

Additional information

Web browser

Notebook, PC or tablet
with Web browser• CDI-RJ45 service
interface• WLAN interface

Special Documentation fordeviceDeviceCare SFE100

Notebook, PC or tablet• CDI-RJ45 service
with Microsoft Windowsinterfacesystem• WLAN interface• Fieldbus protocol→  186

FieldCare SFE500

Notebook, PC or tablet• CDI-RJ45 service
with Microsoft Windowsinterfacesystem• WLAN interface• Fieldbus protocol→  186

Other operating tools based on FDT technology with a device driver such as DTM/
iDTM or DD/EDD can be used for device operation. These operating tools are available
from the individual manufacturers. Integration into the following operating tools,
among others, is supported:• Field Device Manager (FDM) by Honeywell → www.honeywellprocess.com• FieldMate by Yokogawa → www.yokogawa.com• PACTWare → www.pactware.com
The associated device description files are available at: www.endress.com →Downloads
Web serverThanks to the integrated Web server, the device can be operated and configured via a Web
browser and via a service interface (CDI-RJ45) or via a WLAN interface. The structure of
the operating menu is the same as for the local display. In addition to the measured values,
status information on the device is also displayed and allows the user to monitor the statusof the device. Furthermore the device data can be managed and the network parameters
can be configured.
A device that has a WLAN interface (can be ordered as an option) is required for the
WLAN connection: order code for "Display; operation", option G "4-line, illuminated; touch
control + WLAN". The device acts as an Access Point and enables communication bycomputer or a mobile handheld terminal.

208

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Technical data

Supported functions
Data exchange between the operating unit (such as a notebook for example) and themeasuring device:– Upload the configuration from the measuring device (XML format, configuration
backup)– Save the configuration to the measuring device (XML format, restore configuration)– Export event list (.csv file)– Export parameter settings (.csv file or PDF file, document the measuring point
configuration)– Export the Heartbeat verification log (PDF file, only available with the "Heartbeat
Verification" application package)– Flash firmware version for device firmware upgrade, for instance– Download driver for system integration– Visualize up to 1000 saved measured values (only available with the Extended
HistoROM application package →  212)
Web server special documentation →  214

HistoROM
data management

The measuring device features HistoROM data management. HistoROM data management
comprises both the storage and import/export of key device and process data, making
operation and servicing far more reliable, secure and efficient.
When the device is delivered, the factory settings of the configuration data are stored
as a backup in the device memory. This memory can be overwritten with an updated
data record, for example after commissioning.
Additional information on the data storage concept

There are different types of data storage units in which device data are stored and used by the device:
Available data

Device memory

T-DAT

S-DAT

• Event logbook such as diagnostic eventsfor example• Parameter data record backup• Device firmware package• Driver for system integration for exporting
via Web server, e.g:
GSD for PROFIBUS DP• Measured value logging ("Extended
HistoROM" order option)• Current parameter data record (usedby firmware at run time)• Peakhold indicator (min/max values)• Totalizer values• Sensor data: nominal diameter etc.
• Serial number• Calibration data
• Device configuration (e.g. SW options,
fixed I/O or multi I/O)

Attachable to the user interface board in
the connection compartment

In the sensor plug in the transmitter
neck part

Storage location Fixed on the user interface board in theconnection compartment

Data backup
Automatic• The most important device data (sensor and transmitter) are automatically saved in the
DAT modules• If the transmitter or measuring device is replaced: once the T-DAT containing theprevious device data has been exchanged, the new measuring device is ready for
operation again immediately without any errors• If the sensor is replaced: once the sensor has been replaced, new sensor data aretransferred from the S-DAT in the measuring device and the measuring device is readyfor operation again immediately without any errors• If exchanging the electronics module (e.g. I/O electronics module): Once the electronics
module has been replaced, the software of the module is compared against the current
device firmware. The module software is upgraded or downgraded where necessary. The
electronics module is available for use immediately afterwards and no compatibility
problems occur.

Endress+Hauser

209

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

ManualAdditional parameter data record (complete parameter settings) in the integrated device
memory HistoROM backup for:• Data backup function
Backup and subsequent restoration of a device configuration in the device memory
HistoROM backup• Data comparison function
Comparison of the current device configuration with the device configuration saved in
the device memory HistoROM backup
Data transfer
Manual• Transfer of a device configuration to another device using the export function of thespecific operating tool, e.g. with FieldCare, DeviceCare or Web server: to duplicate theconfiguration or to store in an archive (e.g. for backup purposes)• Transmission of the drivers for system integration via Web server, e.g.:
GSD for PROFIBUS DP
Event list
Automatic• Chronological display of up to 20 event messages in the events list
• If the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled: up to 100
event messages are displayed in the events list along with a time stamp, plain text
description and remedial measures• The events list can be exported and displayed via a variety of interfaces and operating
tools e.g. DeviceCare, FieldCare or Web server
Data logging
ManualIf the Extended HistoROM application package (order option) is enabled:• Record up to 1 000 measured values via 1 to 4 channels• User configurable recording interval• Record up to 250 measured values via each of the 4 memory channels• Export the measured value log via a variety of interfaces and operating tools e.g.
FieldCare, DeviceCare or web server

16.12 Certificates and approvals
Currently available certificates and approvals can be called up via the productconfigurator.
CE mark

The device meets the legal requirements of the applicable EU Directives. These are listed in
the corresponding EU Declaration of Conformity along with the standards applied.
Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.

C-Tick symbol

The measuring system meets the EMC requirements of the "Australian Communications
and Media Authority (ACMA)".

Ex approval

The devices are certified for use in hazardous areas and the relevant safety instructions areprovided in the separate "Safety Instructions" (XA) document. Reference is made to thisdocument on the nameplate.

210

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Pharmaceuticalcompatibility• FDA• USP Class VI• TSE/BSE Certificate of Suitability

Certification PROFIBUSPROFIBUS interface

Technical data

The measuring device is certified and registered by the PNO (PROFIBUS User Organization
Organization). The measuring system meets all the requirements of the following
specifications:• Certified in accordance with PROFIBUS PA Profile 3.02
• The device can also be operated with certified devices of other manufacturers(interoperability)
Radio approval

The measuring device has radio approval.
For detailed information on the radio approval, see the Special Documentation

Pressure Equipment
Directive• With the identification PED/G1/x (x = category) on the sensor nameplate,Endress+Hauser confirms conformity with the "Essential Safety Requirements" specified
in Appendix I of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU.
• Devices not bearing this marking (PED) are designed and manufactured according togood engineering practice. They meet the requirements of Article 4 paragraph 3 of thePressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU. The range of application is indicated intables 6 to 9 in Annex II of the Pressure Equipment Directive 2014/68/EU.

Measuring instrument
approval

The measuring device is qualified to OIML R117 and has an OIML Certificate ofConformity (optional).

Additional certification

PWIS-free
PWIS = paint-wetting impairment substances
Order code for "Service":• Option HC: PWIS-free (version A)• Option HD: PWIS-free (version B)• Option HE: PWIS-free (version C)
For more information on PWIS-free certification, see "Test specification" document
TS01028D

Other standards andguidelines

Endress+Hauser• EN 60529
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)• EN 61010-1
Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratoryuse - general requirements• IEC/EN 61326
Emission in accordance with Class A requirements. Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC
requirements).
• NAMUR NE 21
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) of industrial process and laboratory control
equipment• NAMUR NE 32
Data retention in the event of a power failure in field and control instruments withmicroprocessors

211Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP• NAMUR NE 43
Standardization of the signal level for the breakdown information of digital transmitterswith analog output signal.
• NAMUR NE 53
Software of field devices and signal-processing devices with digital electronics• NAMUR NE 105
Specifications for integrating fieldbus devices in engineering tools for field devices• NAMUR NE 107
Self-monitoring and diagnosis of field devices• NAMUR NE 131
Requirements for field devices for standard applications• ETSI EN 300 328
Guidelines for 2.4 GHz radio components.
• EN 301489
Electromagnetic compatibility and radio spectrum matters (ERM).

16.13 Application packages
Many different application packages are available to enhance the functionality of thedevice. Such packages might be needed to address safety aspects or specific application
requirements.
The application packages can be ordered with the device or subsequently fromEndress+Hauser. Detailed information on the order code in question is available from yourlocal Endress+Hauser sales center or on the product page of the Endress+Hauser website:www.endress.com.
Diagnostics functions

Package

Description

Extended HistoROM

Comprises extended functions concerning the event log and the activation of themeasured value memory.
Event log:
Memory volume is extended from 20 message entries (standard version) to up to
100 entries.
Data logging (line recorder):• Memory capacity for up to 1000 measured values is activated.
• 250 measured values can be output via each of the 4 memory channels. The
recording interval can be defined and configured by the user.
• Measured value logs can be accessed via the local display or operating tool e.g.
FieldCare, DeviceCare or Web server.

Heartbeat Technology

Package

Description

Heartbeat Verification+Monitoring

Heartbeat Verification
Meets the requirement for traceable verification to DIN ISO 9001:2008 Chapter
7.6 a) "Control of monitoring and measuring equipment".
• Functional testing in the installed state without interrupting the process.
• Traceable verification results on request, including a report.
• Simple testing process via local operation or other operating interfaces.
• Clear measuring point assessment (pass/fail) with high test coverage within theframework of manufacturer specifications.
• Extension of calibration intervals according to operator's risk assessment.
Heartbeat Monitoring
Continuously supplies data, which are characteristic of the measuring principle, toan external condition monitoring system for the purpose of preventive
maintenance or process analysis. These data enable the operator to:• Draw conclusions - using these data and other information - about the impact
process influences (such as corrosion, abrasion, buildup etc.) have on themeasuring performance over time.
• Schedule servicing in time.
• Monitor the process or product quality, e.g. gas pockets.

212

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Cleaning

Technical data

Package

Description

Electrode cleaning circuit(ECC)

The electrode cleaning circuit (ECC) function has been developed to have a solution
for applications where magnetite (Fe3O4) deposits frequently occur (e.g. hotwater). Since magnetite is highly conductive this build up leads to measuring errors
and ultimately to the loss of signal. The application package is designed to AVOID
build up of highly conductive matter and thin layers (typical of magnetite).

16.14 Accessories
Overview of accessories available for order →  185

16.15 Supplementary documentation
For an overview of the scope of the associated Technical Documentation, refer to thefollowing:• W@M Device Viewer (www.endress.com/deviceviewer): Enter the serial number
from nameplate• Endress+Hauser Operations App: Enter the serial number from the nameplate orscan the 2D matrix code (QR code) on the nameplate
Standard documentation

Brief Operating Instructions

Brief Operating Instructions for the sensor
Measuring device

Documentation code

Proline Promag P

KA01290D

Brief Operating Instructions for transmitter
Measuring device

Documentation code

Proline 300

KA01385D

Technical Information
Measuring device

Documentation code

Promag P 300

TI01224D

Description of device parameters
Measuring device

Documentation code

Promag 300

GP01135D

Device-dependent
additional documentation

Safety instructions
Safety instructions for electrical equipment for hazardous areas.

Contents

Documentation code

ATEX/IECEx Ex d/Ex de

XA01414D

ATEX/IECEx Ex ec

XA01514D

cCSAus XP

XA01515D

Endress+Hauser

213

Technical data

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Contents

Documentation code

cCSAus Ex d/ Ex de

XA01516D

cCSAus Ex nA

XA01517D

INMETRO Ex d/Ex de

XA01518D

INMETRO Ex ec

XA01519D

NEPSI Ex d/Ex de

XA01520D

NEPSI Ex nA

XA01521D

Remote display and operating module DKX001
Contents

Documentation code

ATEX/IECEx Ex i

XA01494D

ATEX/IECEx Ex ec

XA01498D

cCSAus IS

XA01499D

cCSAus Ex nA

XA01513D

INMETRO Ex i

XA01500D

INMETRO Ex ec

XA01501D

NEPSI Ex i

XA01502D

NEPSI Ex nA

XA01503D

Special Documentation
Contents

Documentation code

Information on the Pressure Equipment Directive

SD01614D

Radio approvals for WLAN interface for A309/A310 display module

SD01793D

Remote display and operating module DKX001

SD01763D

Contents

Documentation code

Heartbeat Technology

SD02206D

Web server

SD02235D

Installation Instructions
Contents

Comment

Installation instructions for spare part sets and accessories• Access the overview of all the available spare part sets via
W@MDevice Viewer →  183• Accessories available for order with Installation Instructions →  185

214

Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Index

Index
A

About this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Access authorization to parameters
Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Incorrect input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Adapting the diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Additional certification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Ambient temperature
Influence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Analog Input module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Analog Output module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Applicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

C

C-Tick symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Cable entries
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Cable entry
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 210
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Certification PROFIBUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Checklist
Post-connection check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Cleaning
Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Advanced settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Configuring the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Compatibility with earlier model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 34
Connecting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Connecting the signal cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Connecting the supply voltage cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Connection
see Electrical connection
Connection examples, potential equalization . . . . 41, 42
Connection preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Connection tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Context menu
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Current consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Cyclic data transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Endress+HauserD

Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Define access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 129
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 198
Designated use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Device description files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Device documentation
Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Device locking, status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Device master file
GSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Device nameSensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Device repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Device type ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Diagnostic behavior
Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Diagnostic information
Design, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146, 149
DeviceCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Light emitting diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Remedial measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Diagnostic list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Diagnostic message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Diagnostics
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
DIP switches
see Write protection switch
Direct access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Direct access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Disabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Discrete Input module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Discrete Output module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Displaysee Onsite display
Display and operating module DKX001 . . . . . . . . . . 207
Display area
For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Display values
For locking status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Document
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Symbols used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Document function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Down pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
215

IndexE

ECC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Editing view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Using operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 57
Electrical connection
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Operating tools
Via PROFIBUS DP network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Via service interface (CDI-RJ45) . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Via WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
WLAN interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
EMPTY_MODULE module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Enabling write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Enabling/disabling the keypad lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Endress+Hauser services
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Environment
Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Shock resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Error messages
see Diagnostic messages
Event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Ex approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Extended order code
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Exterior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

F

FDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Field of application
Residual risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
FieldCare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Device description file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Establishing a connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
User interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Filtering the event logbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
FirmwareRelease date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Firmware history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Fitted electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Flow direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Flow limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Functionssee Parameter

216

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

G

Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

H

Hardware write protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Heavy sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Help text
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
HistoROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

I

Identifying the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Incoming acceptance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Influence
Ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Inlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Inspection
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Received goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Inspection check
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Installation conditions
Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Down pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Heavy sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Inlet and outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Installation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Partially filled pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
System pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Thermal insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Installation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Interior cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

L

Languages, operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Line recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
see Diagnostic message
see In alarm condition
see Operational display
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

M

Main electronics module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Maintenance tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Replacing seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Manufacturer ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Manufacturing date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Maximum measured error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Measured values
Calculated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Measured . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
see Process variables
Measuring and test equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Measuring device
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Integrating via communication protocol . . . . . . . . 75
Mounting the sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Mounting the ground cable/ground disks . . . . . 27
Mounting the seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Screw tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Preparing for electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Preparing for mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Switch-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Measuring instrument approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Measuring tube specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Mechanical load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Medium temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Menu
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90, 91
Menus
For measuring device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
For specific settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
ModuleAnalog input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Analog output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Discrete Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Discrete Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
EMPTY_MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Totalizer
SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
SETTOT_TOTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
TOTAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Mounting dimensions
see Installation dimensions
Mounting location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Mounting preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Mounting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

N

NameplateSensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Navigation path (navigation view) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Navigation view
In the submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
In the wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Endress+Hauser

Index

O

Onsite display
Numeric editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Operable flow range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 146
Operating keys
see Operating elements
Operating menu
Menus, submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Submenus and user roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Operating philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Operation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Operational safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Order code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
Orientation (vertical, horizontal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Outlet runs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

P

Packaging disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Parameter
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Entering values or text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Parameter settings
Administration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Analog inputs (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Communication (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Configuration backup (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Current input (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Current input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Current output (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Data logging (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Define access code (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Device information (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Diagnostics (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Display (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Display (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Electrode cleaning circuit (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . 120
Empty pipe detection (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
I/O configuration (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Low flow cut off (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Process variables (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Pulse/frequency/switch output (Wizard) 101,
102,
105
Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n (Submenu) 136
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Relay output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Relay output 1 to n (Wizard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Reset access code (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Sensor adjustment (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
217

IndexSetup (Menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Simulation (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Status input (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Status input 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
System units (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Totalizer 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 133
Totalizer handling (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Value current output 1 to n (Submenu) . . . . . . . . 135
Web server (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
WLAN Settings (Submenu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Partially filled pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Performance characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Pharmaceutical compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Post-connection check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Post-installation check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Post-installation check (checklist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Power supply failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Pressure Equipment Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Pressure tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Pressure-temperature ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Process conditions
Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Flow limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Fluid temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Pressure tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Product safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Profile version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Protecting parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

RRadio approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Read access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Reading measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Recalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Remedial measures
Calling up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Repair of a device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Replacement
Device components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Replacing seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Requirements for personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Return . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

S

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Screw tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

218

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

SensorMounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 17
Setting the operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Settings
Adapting the measuring device to the process
conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Advanced display configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Analog input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Communication interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Current input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Device reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Device tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Electrode cleaning circuit (ECC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Empty pipe detection (EPD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Local display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Managing the device configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Operating language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Pulse output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . . . . . 101, 102
Relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Resetting the totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Totalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Totalizer reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
WLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
SETTOT_MODETOT_TOTAL module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
SETTOT_TOTAL module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Shock resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Showing data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Spare part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Special connection instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Status area
For operational display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
In the navigation view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Status signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145, 148
Storage conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Storage temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Structure
Measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Submenu
Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124, 125
Advanced setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89, 93
Configuration backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Endress+Hauser

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Current input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Data logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Device information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Electrode cleaning circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Event list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
I/O configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Input values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Measured values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Output values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Process variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Pulse/frequency/switch output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . 136
Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Reset access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Status input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Status input 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
System units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Totalizer 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 133
Totalizer handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Value current output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Web server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
WLAN Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Supply voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Surface roughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Switch output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Symbols
Controlling data entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
For communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
For diagnostic behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
For locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
For measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
For measurement channel number . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
For menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
For parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
For status signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
For submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
For wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
In the status area of the local display . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Input screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
System design
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
see Measuring device design
System integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
System pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

T

Technical data, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Temperature range
Ambient temperature range for display . . . . . . . . 206
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Text editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Thermal insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Endress+Hauser

Index

Tool tipsee Help text
Tools
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
For mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
TOTAL module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Totalizer
Assign process variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Transmitter
Turning the display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Turning the housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Transporting the measuring device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Troubleshooting
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
TSE/BSE Certificate of Suitability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Turning the display module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Turning the electronics housing
see Turning the transmitter housing
Turning the transmitter housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

U

Use of the measuring device
Borderline cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Incorrect use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
see Designated use
User interface
Current diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Previous diagnostic event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
User roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
USP Class VI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

V

Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

W

W@M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 183
W@M Device Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 183
WeightTransport (notes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
WizardCurrent input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Current output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Define access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Empty pipe detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Pulse/frequency/switch output . . . . . . 101, 102, 105
Relay output 1 to n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
WLAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Workplace safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Write access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Write protection
Via access code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Via write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
219

Index

Proline Promag P 300 PROFIBUS DP

Write protection switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

220

Endress+Hauser

www.addresses.endress.com